Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX D2011 G User Manual
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-D2011-S  
VSX-D2011-G  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TWO VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
SWITCHES (multi-voltage  
model only)  
Only multi-voltage model is provided with these  
switches. Mains voltages in Saudi Arabia are 127  
V and 220 V only. Never use this model with the  
110 V setting in Saudi Arabia.  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5°C – +35°C (+41°F – +95°F); less than 85%RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
Do not install in the following locations  
• Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong  
artificial light  
• Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly  
ventilated location  
H045 En  
Only multi-voltage model is provided with  
this(these) switch(switches).  
[For European model]  
European models are not pro-vided with these  
switches.  
The line voltage selector switches are on the rear  
panel. Check that they are set properly before  
plugging the power cord into the household wall  
socket. If the voltage is not properly set or if you  
move to an area where the voltage requirements  
differ, adjust the selector switches as follows.  
1. Use a medium-size screwdriver.  
2. First, insert the screwdriver in the groove of the  
larger voltage selector, and adjust so that the tip  
of the groove points to the voltage value of your  
area.  
3. Next, insert the screwdriver in the groove of the  
amaller voltage selector and adjust until the  
voltage is the same as at the larger one.  
TWO VOLTAGE SELECTORS  
230  
220V  
240V  
110V 120−127V  
110V  
120-127V  
220V  
230-240V  
CAUTION 220 V  
Power source voltage is factory adjusted 220 volts. If  
your  
area is different, change voltage selectors settings.  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Features .................................................6 Displays & Controls ............................28  
Front Panel ................................................................. 28  
Remote Control .......................................................... 30  
Display ........................................................................ 33  
Back Panel .................................................................. 34  
Before You Start ....................................7  
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................... 7  
Preparing the Remote Control .................................... 7  
Loading the batteries ............................................. 7  
Setting Up for Surround Sound ........36  
Remote Control Battery Indicator ......................... 7  
Operating range of remote control unit ............... 8  
Installing the Receiver ................................................. 8  
Opening the Front Panel ............................................. 8  
Switching video system between PAL and NTSC (if  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (Surround Back System) ...... 37  
QUICK setup ............................................................... 38  
NORMAL setup .......................................................... 39  
SPEAKER SETTING .............................................. 40  
CHANNEL LEVEL (channel balance) ................... 42  
CHANNEL DELAY ................................................. 43  
necessary) ...........................................................................  
8
Easy Setup Guide Part 1.......................9  
Basic Operation ...................................44  
Home Theater: The Basics .......................................... 9  
1) Your Home System ............................................ 9  
2) The Source Material ........................................... 9  
3) The Listening Modes.......................................... 9  
Conclusion .............................................................. 9  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV ..................... 10  
Digital Connections .............................................. 10  
2 Speaker Connections ........................................... 11  
3 Setting up the Main Unit...................................... 12  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs ................................ 12  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback ........................... 44  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input ......... 45  
Listening Modes ........................................................ 46  
STEREO modes..................................................... 46  
MOVIE modes (SURROUND mode) .................... 47  
MUSIC modes (SURROUND mode).................... 48  
Adjusting the Effect of a Listening Mode ........... 49  
Adding/Adjusting the Effect in  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music Mode ........................... 49  
Listening with ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ .......... 50  
Reducing Noise During Playback  
Easy Setup Guide Part 2.....................13  
(DIGITAL NR Function) .............................................. 50  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode................................... 51  
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode ................................. 51  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (TONE CONTROL) ........ 52  
Listening in HI-BIT/SAMPLING mode ...................... 53  
DVD-Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback .............. 53  
SB CH MODE button.................................................. 54  
SB CH MODE......................................................... 54  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK Mode ..................... 54  
DUAL MONO setting and Playback .......................... 55  
Using Headphones .................................................... 55  
Video Select ............................................................... 56  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display  
1 Auto Surround Sound Setup ............................... 13  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound ................. 15  
Connecting Your Equipment ..............16  
Connecting your TV ................................................... 16  
Component Video Input Default Settings ........... 16  
Connecting Video Components................................ 17  
Connecting a DVD player ..................................... 17  
Connecting VCRs or DVRs ................................... 18  
Connecting a Video Component  
to the Front Panel ................................................. 18  
Connecting Satellite TV(SAT) Components........ 19  
Connecting Analog Audio Components .................. 20  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs  
(DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) compatible  
player) ......................................................................21  
Connecting Digital Audio Components ................... 22  
Digital Input Default Settings .............................. 23  
Connecting the Radio Antennas ............................... 24  
Using outdoor antennas ...................................... 24  
Connecting Speakers................................................. 25  
Speaker impedance .............................................. 26  
Placing Your Speakers ............................................... 27  
Speaker placement ............................................... 27  
AC Power Cord........................................................... 27  
AC Outlet [switched 100W max]  
(DIMMER) ................................................................... 56  
Using the Tuner ...................................57  
Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................. 57  
MPX Mode ............................................................ 57  
RF ATT Mode (European model only) ................ 57  
Channel Step Setting (multi-voltage model only) ... 58  
To Change Channel Steps  
(multi-voltage model only) .................................. 58  
Direct Access Tuning ................................................. 58  
Memorizing Frequently Used Stations .................... 59  
Naming Memorized Stations .................................... 60  
Recalling Memorized Stations .................................. 61  
(European model only).............................................. 27  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
An introduction to RDS (European model only) ..... 62  
Using the RDS display ......................................... 62  
Searching for RDS programs  
(European model only).............................................. 63  
Basics of EON (Enhanced Other Network  
information) (European model only) ....................... 64  
Using EON (European model only) .......................... 64  
Clearing all stations from  
Fine Tuning Your System ...................89  
Other System Settings .............................................. 89  
THX CINEMA Setup ................................................... 90  
Assigning the Digital Inputs...................................... 91  
Assigning the Component Video Inputs .................. 92  
FUNCTION RENAME ................................................. 93  
PHONO/LINE Setup ................................................... 94  
Expert Setup............................................................... 95  
CROSSOVER NETWORK ...................................... 96  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL ......................................... 97  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY ........................................ 98  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ ............................................... 99  
BASS PEAK LEVEL ............................................. 102  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL ............................ 103  
the RDS or EON search (European model only) ..... 65  
Remote Control of Other  
Components ........................................66  
Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other  
Components ............................................................... 66  
Recalling Settings Stored in the  
Remote Control..................................................... 66  
Programming Signals from Other Remote  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving...104  
Dolby......................................................................... 104  
Dolby Digital ....................................................... 104  
Dolby Pro Logic II ............................................... 104  
Dolby Digital Surround EX ................................ 105  
DTS ........................................................................... 105  
DTS ...................................................................... 105  
DTS-ES ................................................................ 105  
DTS Neo:6 ........................................................... 105  
DTS 96/24 ............................................................ 105  
THX ........................................................................... 106  
Schemata of Setup Screens.................................... 107  
Speaker Placement Information ............................. 108  
Troubleshooting ....................................................... 110  
Preset Code Brands ................................................. 115  
Specifications (European model) ........................... 117  
Specifications (multi-voltage model)...................... 118  
Controls (LEARNING Mode) ................................ 68  
Using Remote Control with Other Components ..... 70  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD recorder/ Cassette  
Deck operations .................................................... 70  
Cable TV/Satellite TV/ Digital TV/ TV operations  
............................................................................... 71  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION ........................... 72  
Using Other Functions........................73  
Recording from Audio/Video Components ............. 73  
SECOND ZONE (Speaker System B)  
/FRONT BI-AMP Setup ............................................... 74  
Stereo playback in another room  
(SECOND ZONE) ................................................... 74  
Bi-amping the front speakers  
(FRONT BI-AMP) ................................................... 74  
A/B Speaker Button .............................................. 75  
Setting up and Using the USB Audio Connection.... 76  
Connecting Additional Amplifiers ............................ 78  
The PIONEER SR System: Operating other PIONEER  
components ............................................................... 79  
Multi Operations ........................................................ 80  
Performing multi operations ............................... 81  
SYSTEM OFF .............................................................. 82  
Using SYSTEM OFF.............................................. 83  
Editing Remote Control Display Names .................. 84  
Editing Buttons Names (KEY LABEL) ....................... 85  
Adjusting the Light on the Remote Control............. 86  
Clearing Remote Control Settings You Have Input .. 87  
Resetting the Main Unit ............................................ 88  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
High Quality, Balanced Multichannel Design  
The VSX-D2011 receiver is constructed with Pioneer’s industry-leading advanced and well balanced  
multichannel Featuresconcept. This means it is designed to reproduce music and movie soundtracks as close as  
possible to the intentions of the producer during mastering. The receiver uses a revolutionary 3-D Frame  
Construction technique and a Symmetrical Power Train Design, with high-performance Advanced Direct Energy  
MOS-FET output devices, generating 100 watts of power for 7 independent channels.  
Multichannel Acoustic Calibration EQ System (MCACC)  
In order to make setting up as easy as possible for users we have created the MCACC system. This unique and  
convenient way of getting good surround sound from the receiver makes trouble-free set up a snap. With the  
microphone plugged into the front panel the MCACC system creates a monitoring environment to establish the  
parameters of the sound for the specific room you are using. The MCACC system adjusts the parameters to  
establish excellent surround sound effects and offer you the best in home theater for the minimum of effort.  
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 and the Latest Audio and Video  
Formats  
The VSX-D2011 is equipped with Dolby Digital EX decoding, the very latest Dolby Digital contribution to home  
theater with surround back speakers in addition to surround speakers. These additional speakers make home  
theater even more realistic and powerful. Naturally, you can also play all existing audio formats, including the  
recently developed Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS-ES Extended Surround formats on the VSX-D2011 as well. On  
the video side, the component video output is fully compatible with high definition, progressive-scan digital  
video (720p).  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Lucasfilm, Ltd. & TM. Surround EX  
is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby  
Laboratories, and is a trademark of Dolby  
Laboratories. All rights reserved. Used under  
authorization.  
"DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround" and "Neo:6" are  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Universal Player Compatibility (DVD Audio/Super Audio CD [SACD]  
)
This receiver incorporates the latest technology and is able to handle cutting edge audio formats, like DVD Audio  
and Super Audio CD (SACD) which are just hitting the market. Its high compatibility offers a variety of inputs to  
decode all types of sources at the highest possible quality. The receiver’s multichannel input connections lets you  
hook up eight discrete channels of audio.  
USB Audio Hooks ups  
The USB Audio port is a future-oriented connector that allows you to hook a USB-compatible PC to the receiver.  
Audio Scaler (HI BIT/HI SAMPLING)  
This new technology enables the user to hear CD and DVD, as well as other soundtracks at a wider dynamic  
range, allowing for finer audio reproduction. This Audio Scaler approximates the audio of high end formats just  
becoming available now.  
LCD Illuminated Remote Control  
This self-illuminating remote control simplifies operation even in a darkened home theater room. Preset codes  
for other equipment and a learning function make it possible to use the remote control to operate products from  
other manufacturers. The full range of receiver functions can be controlled using the remote.  
The Energy-saving Design  
The European model is designed to use 0.7 W of energy when the receiver is in standby mode, while the multi-  
voltage model is designed to use 0.9 W.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Start  
Checking the Supplied Accessories  
Please check that you have received all of the following supplied accessories.  
AM Loop Antenna FM Wire Antenna  
“AA” IEC LR6  
batteries x 4  
AC Power Cord x 2  
(multi-voltage model only)  
Microphone Stand for Auto  
Surround Sound Setup  
Microphone for Auto  
Surround Sound Setup  
Operating  
Instructions  
Remote Control Unit  
Multi-voltage model has two power cords. These accessories will be different depending on the  
country of purchase. Please use the correct cord for your country.  
memo  
Preparing the Remote Control  
Loading the batteries  
Load the batteries into the remote control as shown below. Please use alkaline batteries. When you notice a  
decrease in the operating range, replace all batteries with new ones.  
1
2
3
“AA” IEC LR6  
batteries x 4  
CAUTION!  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions.  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s  
rules that apply in your country or area.  
Remote Control Battery Indicator  
When the batteries get too weak to operate the remote control  
properly an indicator warning screen will appear on the remote.  
Change the batteries as shown above. This must be done within  
five minutes or all your remote control settings will be cleared.  
Shows when the batteries are getting weak  
SETUP  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Start  
Operating range of remote control unit  
The area in which you can use the remote control to operate the VSX-D2011 is fairly large. To use, point the  
remote control toward the remote sensor on the front panel of this unit while within the range shown below.  
Remote control may not function properly if:  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the remote sensor.  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
• The receiver located near a device emitting infrared  
rays.  
30  
30  
S0  
URC  
• Operated simultaneously with another remote control  
which uses infrared rays.  
E
S
E
T
U
P
D
V
TV  
D
/
LD  
V
C
MULTI  
VCR  
D
R
1
/
SYS  
TEM  
V
R
T
V
CD  
CON  
OFF  
DIMMER  
T
1
2
R
OL  
S
AMP  
VI  
C
A
T
D
TA  
D
EO  
-R  
E1  
SE  
IN  
P
/
VIDE  
5
L
PUT  
TO  
A
TV  
N
SIGN  
2
TT  
T
O
C
O
E
U
SYST  
9
N
T
A
L
LOUDNESSN  
EM  
S
B
A
6
SEL  
E
R
OP  
ER UL  
AT TI  
IO  
M
M
E
SS  
N
ETU  
/T  
DI  
3
N
U
P
1
R
EB  
TAP  
AB  
SPEAKER A/  
0
LE  
M
P
STATUS  
IDE  
0
E
2
G
7
U
EF  
F
–
4
ECT  
MPX  
RECT  
1
ACC1  
+
1
/CH  
TUNI  
E
0
8
SEL  
N
T
ES  
+
L
1 N  
G
E
R
S
1
STAT  
4IO  
–
REM  
D
IS  
2
ODE  
D
IS  
P
O
TE  
SET  
M
C
CHA  
N
RF  
A
–
TT  
N
8
U
P
NEL  
B
–
AN  
7m  
D
EXI  
T
RN  
3
RE  
TU  
T
CLAS  
V
V
TV  
IN  
EX  
T
RA  
O
7
S
L
TV  
TUNING  
C
PU  
M
EN  
O
T
N
U
TR  
¡
T
O
L
STAT  
+
T
V
IN  
P
H
X
C
U
¢
CHANNE  
ION  
H
AD  
T
+
S
M
CI VA  
M
U
ID  
N
IG  
N
E
N
C
R
ED  
R
S
L
AC  
OUS  
CA  
A
O
U
TAN  
H
T
+
N
DA  
D
IG  
IT  
D
RD  
L
TIC  
AD  
CO VA  
NC NC  
ER ED  
N
R
A
V
O
(D  
L
L
VD  
S
U
T
/
D
TE  
IR  
M
E
MU -A/  
IN LT  
LI  
R
E
C
SA  
CD  
S
EO  
T
PU  
I
T
C
M
TE  
N
H
)
OD IN  
E
A
V
G
P
M
U
T
R
E
LIS  
CH  
-P  
T
R
S
EN  
E
R
O
G
E
L
I
N
E
R
A
EC  
T
G
M
O
M
M
TE  
C
E
L
A
O
D
IG  
H
T
X
N
A
D
TR  
N
7
D
2
O
L
9
LE  
A
0
U
N
R
Î
IT  
N
IN  
G
Installing the Receiver  
CAUTION!  
• Do not cover this unit in any way, for exam-  
ple with a sheet or piece of cloth. This would  
prevent proper heat dispersal.  
• Do not any place object directly on top of this  
unit. This also would prevent proper heat  
dispersal.  
Opening the Front Panel  
To open the front panel push gently on the lower third of the panel  
with your finger.  
Switching video system between PAL and NTSC (if necessary)  
This receiver is able to use two types of video systems for its OSD (on screen display) either PAL or NTSC. If  
you don't match the system on the amplifier with your home system no OSD will appear on your TV. The default  
setting is PAL. If you use this system you don't need to make any settings here. People with multi-system TVs  
don’t need to worry about changing the setting either. If necessary, follow the instructions below to switch the  
type of video system.  
1 Put the receiver in the STANDBY mode.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
2 While holding down the TONE + button  
press the STANDBY/ON button.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TU  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
The video system type will change depending on the state  
the receiver was previously in. The new type, either PAL or  
NTSC, will appear in the display. It will be shown for about  
seven seconds and then the receiver returns to normal  
operating mode.  
DIGITAL IN  
To change the video system type again repeat steps 1 and 2.  
2
2
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part1  
Home Theater: The Basics  
Most consumers are used to using stereo equipment to listen to music but many people are not used to home theater  
systems that give you many more options when listening to soundtracks. In fact, home theater is not really  
complicated and this little guide should give you an understanding of the basics. Home theater refers to the use of  
multiple audio tracks combined with multiple speakers to create a surround sound effect.  
There are three different factors involved in getting surround sound. Each contribute to what kind of sound you get.  
These factors are:  
1) The equipment you are using for your home theater setup. Particularly important is the number of speakers you are  
using. We call this your speaker configuration.  
2) The source material you are using. This is the actual product (like a DVD) or broadcast (like cable TV) you are listening  
to/watching. We call this the source.  
3) The last factor is the listening mode you choose on the VSX-D2011 receiver. These are explained below and in  
subsequent chapters but most likely the PRO LOGIC II MOVIE for moves and the PRO LOGIC II MUSIC for music will  
be fine.  
Let's start with the home theater setup you have in your home.  
1) Your Home System  
The heart of your system is the VSX-D2011 receiver and it is very flexible in getting you theater-like surround sound.  
You can use this receiver with anywhere from two to seven speakers (front left, front right, center, surround left and  
right, and surround back left and right) and a subwoofer to get home theater surround sound. We recommend you use  
seven speakers and a subwoofer. If this is not possible follow the instructions in "Auto Surround Setup" in the "Easy  
Setup Guide Part 2" and you will still be able to get good surround sound. Also, a DVD player is essential for home  
theater and you can also hook up satellite or cable TV tuner to this receiver and get a more home theater-like sound  
from these sources.  
2) The Source Material  
DVDs have become the basic source material for home theater because they are convenient to use and offer excellent  
sound and picture quality as well as allow users to enjoy home theater soundtracks with more than two channels of  
audio. For example, Dolby Pro Logic plays back four channels (front left, front right, center and a single channel for both  
surround speakers), Dolby Digital and DTS sources usually have six discrete channels (front left, front right, center,  
surround left and right and a channel that powers the subwoofer) of sound. Since the subwoofer channel is only for  
bass sounds it is expressed as .1 of a channel and this multichannel setup has been named 5.1 channel sound.  
It is important you consult the manual that came with your DVD player as well to make sure the player is outputting a  
surround soundtrack and all the other settings are appropriate for your home theater.  
3) The Listening Modes  
This receiver has many different listening modes and they are designed to cover all the speaker configurations and  
types of sources you might be using. In general, the PRO LOGIC II MOVIE listening mode is the easiest way to get  
realistic surround sound for movies. For music the basic listening mode for music is PRO LOGIC II MUSIC.  
To listen to music in stereo simply choose the STEREO listening mode. Other possibilities (like listening to a stereo CD  
with all seven speakers or taking a stereo source and getting multichannel home theater-like sound) are explained in  
listening modes (pages 46–48).  
Conclusion  
These are the three basic factors that contribute to your home theater sound. The easiest thing is to hook up seven  
speakers and a subwoofer and simply play your DVDs with PRO LOGIC II MOVIE listening mode. This will give you  
realistic and enjoyable home theater sound. First hook up your equipment, like your DVD player, TV and speakers. Then  
follow the Easy Setup Guide instructions to set up your system for surround sound. It is very important you do one of  
the surround sound setups to get optimal sound from your receiver.  
For more details on any of the information presented here check the main section of the manual.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part1  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV  
In order to use Dolby Digital/DTS soundtracks, which are at the heart of home theater, you need to hook up your  
DVD player with digital audio connections. You can do this by either a coaxial or an optical connection, you don’t  
need to do both. The quality of these two types of connections is the same but since some DVD players only  
have one type of digital terminal you need to figure out which yours has and hook it up to the appropriate  
terminal on the receiver. In order to do this you will need the proper cable. For coaxial connections you can use a  
regular RCA video cord or the specially-made coaxial cords, they have the same type of plugs. For optical  
connections you will need a special optical cable which you can buy at your local stereo store. For more  
information on cords and cables see page 23. You should also hook up your DVD player with analog audio  
connections. Use regular RCA stereo cords for these connections. Also hook up the video connection on your  
DVD player, and your TV to this receiver. For your TV it's easiest to use a regular composite (RCA) video cord, as  
shown below. It is important that you hook up your TV (or monitor) in order to see a video image as well as the  
on screen displays (OSDs) shown by this receiver (for more on this see page16).  
Digital Connections  
Some DVD players have both coaxial and optical terminals, but there is no need to connect both. If your DVD  
player has a coaxial terminal (not a PCM-only output) for the audio out hook it up using this terminal. Follow the  
diagram below. This is the best scenario, as you will be able to follow the default settings of this receiver and  
won't need to assign the digital inputs (you should use DIGITAL IN 3).  
If your DVD player only has an optical terminal for the audio output you can hook it up using one of the DIGITAL  
IN terminals between 1-2 (for example, DIGITAL IN 2). In this case, you will need to assign the digital input  
(which means tell the receiver which input you used for your DVD digital audio). See page 12 for this.  
RCA stereo cord  
RCA video cord  
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
L
L
R
R
R
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
(TV/  
SAT)  
IN  
OUT  
DVD/  
LD  
MONITOR OUT 1  
IN  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
IN  
DVD player  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL  
DTS/MPEG  
OR OUT  
AM LOOP  
/
ANTENNA  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
RCA video cord  
OUT1  
3
IN  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
P
B
R
OUT  
(DVD/  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
P
LD)  
R
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
(not a PCM-only  
output)  
IN  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
4
N  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
P
B
R
R
FRONT  
L
L
)  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROU
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
You only need to make  
one DIGITAL connection.  
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
ASSIGNABLE  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
coaxial cord  
optical cord  
VIDEO INPUT  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part1  
2 Speaker Connections  
Home theater is designed to be setup with five, or seven speakers (front left & right; center; surround left &  
right; and, optimally, surround back left & right) and a subwoofer, but you can use this receiver with fewer  
speakers. Hook up the speakers you have to the A speaker terminals on the back of the receiver. If you only  
have two speakers hook them up as FRONT. If you have three hook up the single speaker as CENTER. Follow  
the diagram below in order to hook up all your speakers. A center speaker is very important for watching films  
because in digital soundtracks the dialog comes from the center speaker. If you do not have a center speaker  
you must tell the receiver the center channel is off or when you listen to digital soundtracks you won't hear any  
dialog. This can be done automatically by following the AUTO SURROUND SOUND SETUP instructions from  
page 13 in this Easy Setup Guide.  
If possible, use surround back speakers. These speakers are important to take full advantage of all the sound  
channels on new, eight channel home theater DVDs. The diagram below also explains how to hook up a  
subwoofer which provides realistic bass sounds. For the subwoofer use a mono (single plug) RCA cord and for  
the other speakers use regular speaker cords. See pages 108–109 for advice on speaker placement.  
Make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the R terminal and the speaker on the left to the L terminal.  
Also make sure the positive and negative (+/–) terminals on the receiver match those on the speakers.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Front  
speaker  
(Left)  
Front  
speaker  
(Right)  
TV/monitor  
Center  
speaker  
INPUT  
Surround  
speaker  
(Left)  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL  
/
DTS/MPEG  
SUB  
WOOFER  
Surround  
speaker  
(Right)  
CENTER  
IN  
AC OUTLET  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
P
B
R
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
P
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
N  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
UT  
P
B
R
SWITCHED 100W MAX  
SURROUND BACK  
BACK  
R
FRONT  
L
L
SPEAKERS  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
/
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
L
(DVD/  
N  
P
Å
R
L
R
R
L
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ª
ª
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
UT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
V/  
AT  
N  
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
VD/  
D  
ROUND  
BACK  
·
·
P
N  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Surround back  
speaker (Left)  
Surround back  
speaker (Right)  
• We recommend speakers with a nominal impedance rated 8 Ω-16 Ω, but you can change the  
speaker impedance setting of the receiver (see page 26).  
memo  
• If you only have one surround back speaker hook it up to the left surround back terminal.  
• If you use a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer  
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
• When you attached your speaker wire to the speaker terminal make sure that not even one strand  
of wire touches the back of the receiver. If this happens it could short out the receiver.  
7 Speaker terminals  
2 Loosen speaker terminal  
3 Tighten  
1 Twist exposed wire  
and insert exposed wire.  
terminal.  
strands together  
tightly.  
10mm  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part1  
3 Setting up the Main Unit  
1 Plug the AC power cord into a wall outlet.  
2 Press the –OFF-ON button to put the receiver in ON mode.  
3 Press the STANDBY/ON button to switch the receiver ON.  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs  
This is only necessary if you did not hook up your DVD player to DIGITAL IN 3 using a coaxial cable but  
rather connected it to one of the optical digital inputs. The following example shows how to assign the  
DIGITAL IN 2 jack to DVD. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote control to  
navigate the on-screen display (OSD) on your TV. Conversely, you can use the MULIT JOG dial and ENTER  
button, and look at the display, on the Front Panel.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
SETUP  
press the RECEIVER button on the  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
remote control.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
The SYSTEM SETUP menu appears on your TV (if  
it doesn't, refer to page 10 to make sure you have  
properly connected the receiver to your TV).  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2,7  
ENTER  
EXIT  
3-6  
RETURN  
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
+
System Setup  
3
[ 1. Surround Setup  
[ 2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
[ 3. Input Assign  
[ 4. Function Rename  
[ 5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
[ Exit  
]
4 DIGITAL IN-SELECT should be  
selected, if not use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER  
button.  
]
]
]
3.Input Assign  
[ Digital-In Select  
4
5
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
DIGITAL-2 and press ENTER.  
]
[ Component-In Select ]  
The default setting for the DIGITAL-2 jack is CD-R.  
[Exit]  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select DVD/  
LD and press ENTER.  
Digital-In Select  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
[ TV/SAT ]  
CD-R  
[DVD/LD]  
CD  
[
]
7 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
[
]
The receiver exits the setup process.  
[Exit]  
Digital-In Select  
6
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
[ TV/SAT ]  
[DVD/LD]  
[
[
OFF  
CD  
]
]
[Exit]  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part2  
1 AUTO SURROUND SOUND SETUP  
If setting up your surround sound speakers seems like it's going to be an involved task you only need to  
use this quick, automatic method, known as the MCACC system, to achieve good surround sound. You'll  
need to hook up the microphone so that the receiver can hear and judge the distance, size, sound  
character and sound pressure level of the speakers and thus know what settings to make.  
First turn the volume down, then plug the microphone into the SETUP MIC jack on the front panel of the  
receiver and put the microphone into its stand. If you have a tripod you can affix the mic stand to it.  
Follow the step-by-step guide to setting up your surround sound below. This will customize the surround  
sound for your listening environment. If you want to personalize your surround sound setups by making  
the settings manually go to "Setting up for Surround Sound" (starting on page 36) and "Expert setup"  
(starting on page 95). Make sure all the components you need, especially speakers, have been properly  
connected before you do the steps described here. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on  
the remote control to navigate the on-screen display (OSD) on your TV. Conversely, you can use the  
MULTI JOG dial and ENTER button, and look at the display, on the Front Panel.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
1
1 Hook up the microphone to the  
SETUP MIC jack on the Front Panel.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2 Place the microphone at your  
normal listening position.  
microphone  
stand  
microphone  
Use a table, chair or something else to put the  
microphone at the same height as you usually  
listen to your system from.  
Front Speaker (R)  
Center Speaker  
3 Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Surround Speaker (R)  
Make sure your TV is set to this receiver as you  
will use the on-screen displays (OSDs) on your TV  
to follow these instructions.  
Subwoofer  
Front Speaker (L)  
4 If you have a subwoofer turn it on.  
Listening Position  
Surround Back  
Speaker (R)  
5 Press the RECEIVER button on the  
remote control.  
Surround Speaker (L)  
Surround Back Speaker (L)  
6 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button  
and use the on-screen display  
(OSD) that appears on your TV.  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
3
7 The arrow should be pointing at  
SURROUND SETUP, press ENTER.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
5
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
6
ENTER  
EXIT  
7-13  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
+
8
System Setup  
7
[1. Surround Setup  
[2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
]
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
]
]
[5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
[Exit  
]
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part2  
1.Surround Setup  
8
8 Select AUTO SETTING with the 5∞  
[ SurrBack System ]  
buttons and press ENTER.  
[ Auto Setting  
[ Quick  
[ Normal  
[ Expert  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
9 Some auto setup instructions will be  
listed, make sure to follow them.  
Make sure you have: hooked up the microphone and moved  
obstacles to the speakers out of the way. If you have a  
subwoofer make sure it is turned on and has the volume  
turned up.  
Auto Surround Setup  
10  
Set microphone  
Turn on subwoofer  
WARNING: The test tones are very loud!! Make sure there  
are no infants or small children in the room and that no one  
who will be scared, upset or injured by loud noise is present.  
You yourself may want to wear earplugs. It is possible to  
lower the volume of test tones, but this could result in  
incorrect speaker settings.  
[ Start ]  
[ Cancel ]  
Auto Surround Setup  
Please Wait  
10 If you have followed all setup instructions  
and warnings above make sure that the  
arrow is pointed to START and press  
ENTER. Be prepared for loud test tones.  
Caution!!  
Test tone is  
output loudly.  
[Cancel]  
Try to be as quiet as possible after hitting ENTER. The test  
tones may take up to 30 seconds.  
The volume automatically increases to 0 dB, then the system  
will output some test tones and establish ambient noise  
levels, the microphone status, and what speakers you hooked  
up.  
Auto Surround Setup  
•••  
Now Analyzing  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
Speaker YES/NO  
11 Check the speaker settings on the OSD  
[Cancel]  
If they match your speaker configuration make sure OK is  
selected and press ENTER. The test tones will be output  
loudly again. The test tones may take up to 5 minutes this  
time.  
Check!!  
11  
Front  
[ YES ]  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
[ YES ]  
After it has finished, you see the SPEAKER SYSTEMS CHECK  
screen. If you want to view the settings select NEXT and  
press ENTER repeatedly. If not, simply go to step 13.  
[ YES ]  
[ YES 2 ]  
Subwoofer [ YES ]  
[OK]  
[Retry]  
If they do not match the speaker configuration you hooked up  
and you want to try again select RETRY with 5∞ buttons and  
press ENTER. Follow the instructions above from step 10.  
[ERR Fix SP.]  
[Return to Menu]  
If you get an error message instructing you to do something,  
follow the instructions and RETRY with 5∞ buttons and  
press ENTER.  
Auto Surround Setup  
•••  
Now Analyzing  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker Systems  
Channel Delay  
Channel Level  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
If the speaker settings do not match the speaker configura-  
tion you connected and you want to input the settings  
manually select ERR=FIX SP with the 5∞ buttons, press  
ENTER. Go to step 12.  
[Cancel]  
If you see an ERR message in the right side column, there  
may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting  
RETRY doesn't fix the problem, turn off the power and check  
the speaker connections.  
Speaker Systems Check  
Front  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
X
[SMALL 2]  
[
YES  
]
[Next ]  
[Exit  
]
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Setup Guide Part2  
memo  
12 Use the ∞5 buttons to select a  
speaker press ENTER. Then use the  
∞5 buttons to select the size of  
each speaker individually. Press  
ENTER. Use the ∞5 buttons to  
select OK and press ENTER.  
• Make sure the room environment follows the  
guidelines displayed on the OSD during auto  
setup. If the room environment is not optimal  
for auto setup (too much ambient noise,  
obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone, etc.) the final settings may be  
incorrect. Check for household appliances (air  
conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.) that may be  
affecting the environment and switch them off  
if necessary.  
• Screens will turn off after three minutes and  
the receiver will automatically exit from the  
setup process.  
• If you leave CHECK!! or other error message  
on the screen for three minutes, or you  
choose CANCEL at anytime during the setup,  
the settings made up to that point will be  
cleared.  
The system will output another series of test tones to  
establish the proper channel level, channel delay and  
acoustic calibration EQ. Again, be prepared for loud  
test tones.  
After it has finished, you see the SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS CHECK screen. If you want to view the  
settings select NEXT and press ENTER repeatedly.  
If not, simply go to the next step.  
13 Select RETURN and press ENTER to  
go back to the SYSTEM SETUP  
menu. Then choose EXIT to  
• After completing the AUTO SURROUND  
SOUND SETUP, ACOUSTIC CAL EQ ON (ALL  
CH ADJUST) is set automatically.  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the  
operation of the mic. If this is the case turn  
the TV off when doing AUTO SURROUND  
SOUND SETUP.  
complete the auto surround sound  
setup and return to normal use.  
You should now have settings that will give you  
good surround sound. The MCACC indicator will  
light and the surround sound settings are  
complete.  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound  
1 Make sure the receiver, your TV, your subwoofer and your DVD player  
are switched ON.  
2 Press the DVD/LD button on the remote control.  
You should see DVD/LD in the display on the receiver.  
3 Play a DVD then adjust the MASTER VOLUME.  
memo  
To get a more refined sound, make the sound settings in "Expert setup" (see page 95).  
If you're having trouble getting surround sound playback look at this Frequently  
Asked Questions (FAQ) guide:  
Q1: Even though I'm playing a DVD I'm not getting 5.1 channel playback.  
A1: Either the DVD is not set for digital output, or the Dolby Digital/DTS output settings are not  
correct.  
Set the DVD player to output a digital signal and set the Dolby Digital and DTS output properly. If you are  
unsure how to do this check the DVD initial setup in the manual that came with your DVD player.  
Q2: There is no sound from the subwoofer or it is very low.  
A2: There is a good possibility you haven't reached a part of the DVD that has an LFE channel  
(which feeds the subwoofer) yet. The LFE channel only appears in selected parts of the  
soundtrack. Continue playing and listen for the subwoofer.  
If you want to hear more sound from the subwoofer set it to PLUS (see page 40 for more information and  
consult the memo on page 41).  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting your TV  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your TV to the jacks as shown below. Hook up with either component video, S video, or compos-  
ite video cords (the quality descends in this order) but you must use the same type of video cords to  
hook up your DVD player (and all other video components) as you use to hook up your TV. If you  
plan to hook up your DVD player with component video cords hook up your TV with them as well but in  
this case you must also hook up your TV with composite video or S video cords because you won't be  
able to see the receiver's on-screen displays with a component video hook up. Composite video cords,  
which look just like regular RCA audio cords (see page 20) but have only one cable are the most common.  
In order to set up  
the receiver use  
MONITOR OUT  
1 so that you can  
see the on-  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
TV/monitor  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
PB  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
PR  
screen displays.  
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
B
R
*The arrows  
indicate the  
direction of the  
signal.  
R
FRONT  
L
L
VIDEO IN  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
COMPO-  
VIDEO  
(DVD/  
IN  
P
NENT  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
Y
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
S-VIDEO  
PB  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
PR  
ROUND  
BACK  
P
IN  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
S Video  
Component video  
S video cables produce  
clearer picture  
reproduction by sending  
separate signals for the  
luminance and the color.  
The video signal is  
S VIDEO  
Y
divided into the  
luminance (Y) signal and  
the color (PB and PR)  
signals. In this way,  
interference between  
the signals is avoided.  
Green  
Blue  
PB  
PR  
Red  
Composite Video  
Composite video cords are the most common or standard video cord but also  
the lowest quality. The color on the connector is yellow to distinguish it from  
regular RCA audio cords which have white and red connectors (see page 20).  
It is important to use a true composite video cord and not an audio cord  
(though they look exactly the same) because the impedance is different and  
this will affect the picture quality.  
Component Video Input Default Settings  
If you use component video cords to hook up your video equipment it is easiest to do so following the  
default settings, which are listed below. Remember you must use component video cords from your  
video source (for example, a DVD player) to the receiver and from the receiver to your TV (or monitor). If  
you don't follow the default settings below you must assign the inputs you used with the "Assigning the  
Component Video Inputs" procedure. See page 92 to do this.  
The default settings are:  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1: DVD/LD  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2: TV/SAT  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Video Components  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your video components as shown on this and the following page. For video components (for  
example, a DVD player) there are two types of connections to make, video and audio.  
Hook up your video signal with either component video, S video or composite video cords (the  
quality descends in this order) but you must use the same type of cord as you used to hook up  
your TV.  
For the audio signal, in order to use digital soundtracks like Dolby Digital or DTS you must hook up a digital  
input, with either a coaxial or optical cord (see pages 22 & 23). It is also a good idea to hook up your  
components with analog audio connections as well.  
If you want to record from your DVD player composite (or S video) cord connections and analog audio  
connections are necessary.  
Connecting a DVD player  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Hook up your audio signal with either a coaxial or optical digital cords (you don't need to do both). If you  
hook up your DVD/LD player using component video cable connections you might need to setup your  
DVD player for component video output as well. See your DVD manual for details. If you have a DVD-  
Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) compatible player, see "Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs"  
on page 21.  
You need to hook up your audio with analog connections as well.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
DIGITAL OUT  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
MONITOR OUT  
AM LOOP  
1
2
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
(not a PCM-only output)  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
3
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
PB  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
PR  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
SAT)  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
IN  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Sngle)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
VIDEO  
Y
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
B
R
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
L
L
FRONT  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
DVD player  
(DVD/  
IN  
P
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
S-VIDEO  
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
B
R
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
B
R
P
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
P
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
R
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
L
R
memo • Be sure to make either a digital coaxial or digital optical connection (pictured as DIGITAL  
jack 3 or DIGITAL jack 2 in this diagram) but you don't need to make both.  
• If your digital connections are different than the default settings you will need to assign  
the digital jacks to the proper component(s) with the "Assigning the Digital Inputs"  
procedure. See page 91 to do this.  
• If your component video connections are different from the default settings, you will  
need to assign them with "Assigning the Component Video Inputs". See page 92 to do  
this.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting VCRs or DVRs  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect the video out of your VCR/DVR using either S video or composite video cords, depending on how  
you connected the receiver to your TV (see page 16). Use analog audio cords for the audio signal. To  
record, you also need to connect a set of audio/video outputs from the receiver to the audio/video inputs  
on your VCR/DVR. Note that to record video from a source component, the video connection from the  
source to the receiver and from the receiver to the recorder must be the same type.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
OUT  
IN  
L
L
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
AM LOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
Y
R
R
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITR OUT  
2
1
PB  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
PR  
VCR 1/DVR  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
B
R
R
FRONT  
L
L
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
P
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
OUT  
L
IN  
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
L
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
R
R
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
P
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VCR 2  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
Connecting a Video Component to the Front Panel  
Connect a portable DVD player, video game console or any video component to the front panel as show  
here. Front video connections are accessed via the front panel input selector as VIDEO.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
STATIONTUNING  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SELECT  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
COLOR  
BRIGHT  
MONITOR  
VIDEO-IN/OUT  
AUDIO-IN/OUT  
PHONES  
ON/OFF  
HOLD  
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)  
Be careful! For portable DVD players you will need a  
specialized optical cord (for the audio) that has a mini  
optical plug on one end and a regular optical plug on  
the other.  
You cannot assign the digital input on the front panel. If you want to learn more about  
this process see "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on page 91.  
memo  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Satellite TV (SAT) Components  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Hook up the video signal with either component video, S video, or composite video cords, depending on  
how you connected the receiver to your TV (see page 16).  
For the audio signal, in order to use digital soundtracks broadcast you must hook up a digital input. Use  
either a coaxial or optical cable, it doesn't matter which (see pages 22-23). We recommend hooking up  
your audio with analog cables as well (see below).  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the TV signal.  
VIDEO  
COMPO-  
VIDEO  
OUT  
NENT  
Y
S-VIDEO  
P
B
R
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
P
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
Satellite tuner  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
PB  
PR  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
TAPE1
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
PB  
PR  
BACK  
R
R
FRONT  
L
L
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD
IN  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
EN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
PB  
ASSIGNABLE  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
PR  
USB  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
• If your component video connections are different from the default settings, you will  
need to assign them with "Assigning the Component Video Inputs". See page 92 to do  
this.  
memo  
• If your digital connections are different than the default settings you will need to assign  
the digital jacks to the proper component(s) with the "Assigning the Digital Inputs"  
procedure. See page 91 to do this.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Analog Audio Components  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your audio components to the jacks as shown below. These are all analog connections and your  
analog audio components (turntable, cassette deck) use these jacks. Remember that for components you  
want to record with you need to hook up four plugs (a set of stereo ins and a set of stereo outs), but for  
components that only play (like a turntable) you only need to hook up one set of stereo plugs (two plugs).  
If you want to record to/from digital components (like a CD-R) to/from analog components you must hook  
up your digital equipment with these analog connections.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the audio signal.  
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
L
PCM/  
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
SUB  
WOOFER  
R
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
OUT  
CD player  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
ANALOG  
TV/  
ROUND  
AT)  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
IN  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
CR
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
CD-R/  
L
L
ROUND  
APE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
BACK  
R
FRONT  
L
L
R
R
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
DVD/  
IN  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
Recorder 1 (CD-R/TAPE)  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
L
L
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDO  
S
VIDEO  
R
R
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
Recorder 2 (MD/TAPE)  
7 Audio cords  
Use (RCA) audio cords (not supplied) to con-  
nect the audio components.  
Turntable  
If your turntable has a ground  
wire, connect it to the signal  
ground terminal (H).  
Connect red plugs to  
R (right) and white  
L
plugs to L (left).  
Be sure to insert  
completely.  
R
• If you want to hook up any equipment other than a turntable to the PHONO/LINE jack  
please go to the PHONO/LINE Setup (see page 94) and choose the LINE setting. If your  
turntable has a phono pre-amplifier (most do not) please choose the LINE setting as  
well.  
memo  
• Depending on where the cassette deck is placed, noise may occur during playback of  
your cassette deck which is caused by leakage flux from the transformer in the  
receiver. If you experience noise, move the cassette deck farther away from the  
receiver.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs (DVD-Audio or Super  
Audio CD (SACD) compatible player)  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
If you have a DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) compatible player, or are using an external Dolby  
Digital/DTS decoder, connect it to the multichannel analog inputs as shown below.  
Components equipped with  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
Y
5.1 (7.1) channel analog output jack  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
ANALOG  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
PB  
FRONT  
SURR-  
OUND  
SUB  
SURR-  
OUT  
CENTER  
WOOFER  
OUND BACK  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
PR  
L
L
L
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
R
R
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
B
R
BACK  
R
FRONT  
L
L
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
P
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
P
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
memo If you use only one surround back input, be sure to hook up to the SURROUND BACK Ò  
jack.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Digital Audio Components  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your digital components as shown below. The VSX-D2011 has two coaxial and two optical inputs  
for a total of four digital inputs on the rear panel plus one digital input on the front panel. In order to use  
digital soundtracks like Dolby Digital or DTS (among others) you need to make digital audio connections.  
You can do this by either a coaxial or an optical connection (you don’t need to do both). The quality of  
these two types of connections is the same but since some digital components only have one type of  
digital terminal, it is a matter of matching like with like (for example, the coaxial out from the component  
to coaxial in on the receiver).  
Hook up your digital equipment in accordance with this receiver's default settings (see next page) unless  
you want to, or need to, change them. To do this see "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on page 91.  
There are two optical digital out jacks (the CD recorder is connected to one in the diagram below). If you  
connect this to the optical input on a digital recorder (currently these include MD, DAT and CD-R) you can  
make direct digital recordings with this unit.  
We also recommend hooking up your digital components to analog audio jacks (see page 20) in order to  
make recordings (some digital sources may be protected against making digital copies).  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the audio signal.  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
AM LOOP  
SUB  
WOOFER  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
O
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
SAT)  
IN  
Satellite tuner  
CD recorder  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ROUND  
OUTPUT  
(PLAY)  
INPUT  
(REC)  
IN  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
OUT  
R
FRONT  
L
L
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
B type  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
USB  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DVD player  
CD player  
(not a PCM-only output)  
DIGITAL  
ADIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
A type  
USB cable  
PC  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Optical cable  
7 Coaxial cords/Optical cables  
Commercially available digital audio coaxial  
cords (standard video cords can also be used) or  
optical cables (not supplied) are used to connect  
digital components to this receiver.  
Coaxial cord  
(or standard [composite]  
video cord)  
Be sure to insert completely and in the case of  
the optical cable, right-side up. If it is inserted  
improperly it can break the shutter on the  
optical terminal (this won't, however, affect the  
connection or insertion of an optical cable).  
Digital Input Default Settings  
Unlike analog connections, the jacks for digital connections are not dedicated to one type of component,  
they can be used freely. Thus you must tell the receiver what digital component is connected to which  
jack so your components will be in sync with the names on the remote control buttons and the like. To  
avoid having to assign the digital inputs you can hook up your equipment in accordance with the receiver's  
default settings.  
The default settings are:  
DIGITAL IN 1 (optical): TV/SAT  
DIGITAL IN 2 (optical): CD-R/TAPE1  
DIGITAL IN 3 (coaxial): DVD/LD  
DIGITAL IN 4 (coaxial): CD  
See "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on page 91 if the way you hook up your equipment is different from the  
default settings listed here.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting the Radio Antennas  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect the supplied FM wire antenna and the AM loop antenna to the ANTENNA terminals as shown  
below. These antennas should provide adequate reception quality in most cases, but connecting outdoor  
antennas should noticeably improve sound quality.  
FM wire  
AM loop  
antenna  
antenna  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
AC OUTLET  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
P
B
R
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
P
P
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
OUT  
B
SWITCHED 100W MAX  
7 AM loop antenna  
2 Twist exposed wire strands  
3 Attach to a wall, etc. (if  
desired) and face toward  
the direction providing  
the best reception.  
1 Assemble the antenna.  
together and insert.  
10 mm  
Using outdoor antennas  
7 To improve FM reception  
Connect an external FM antenna.  
7 To improve AM reception  
Connect a 5 – 6 meter length of vinyl-coated wire to the  
AM LOOP ANTENNA terminal in addition to the supplied  
AM loop antenna.  
For best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.  
Outdoor antenna  
PAL connector  
AM loop antenna  
F M UNBAL75  
Ω
5–6 m  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
75 Ω coaxial  
cable  
F M UNBAL75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Speakers  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
We recommend a full complement of seven speakers and a subwoofer as shown here but, naturally,  
everyone's home setup will vary. Simply connect the speakers you have in the manner described below.  
One of the latest features of home theater is the use of surround back speakers. These speakers add  
even greater realism in movie sound effects and some new discs with soundtracks in Dolby Digital or DTS  
incorporate these channels. See page 27 for speaker placement.  
In general, make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the R terminal and the speaker on the left  
to the L terminal. Also make sure the positive and negative (+/–) terminals on the receiver match those on  
the speakers.  
• We recommend speakers with a nominal impedance rated 8 Ω-16 Ω, but you can change the  
speaker impedance setting of the receiver (see page 26).  
memo  
• If you only have one surround back speaker hook it up to the left surround back  
terminal.  
• If you use a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your  
subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Front  
speaker  
(Left)  
Front  
speaker  
(Right)  
TV/monitor  
Center  
speaker  
INPUT  
Surround  
speaker  
(Left)  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL  
/
DTS/MPEG  
SUB  
WOOFER  
Surround  
speaker  
(Right)  
CENTER  
IN  
AC OUTLET  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
P
B
R
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
P
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
N  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VR1/  
DR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
UT  
P
B
R
SWITCHED 100W MAX  
SURROUND BACK  
R
FRONT  
L
L
SPEAKERS  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
/
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
L
(DVD/  
N  
P
Å
R
L
R
R
L
LD)  
R
MD/  
CR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ª
ª
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
UT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
V/  
AT  
N  
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
VD/  
D  
ROUND  
BACK  
·
·
P
N  
AUDIO  
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Surround back  
speaker (Left)  
Surround back  
speaker (Right)  
7 Speaker terminals  
2 Loosen speaker terminal  
3 Tighten  
1 Twist exposed wire  
strands tightly  
together.  
and insert exposed wire.  
terminal.  
10mm  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Speaker impedance  
You can change the speaker impedance for VSX-D2011 but we recommend using speakers with an  
impedance of 8 Ω-16 Ω (the default setting). If you are using 6 Ω- less than 8 Ω impedance speakers, you  
need to change the impedance setting. Use any speaker rated between 6 Ω-16 Ω.  
STANDBY/ON  
SPEAKERS  
First put the receiver in STANDBY mode, then  
AUDIO/VID  
press the power button while holding down the  
SPEAKERS button.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
The receiver will re-set to the new impedance  
setting. With this method you can choose the 8 Ω-  
16 Ω setting or the 6 Ω-8 Ω setting.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
To check which impedance setting  
to hold down the SPEAKERS  
button for 2-3 seconds. You'll get  
a display like these telling you the  
speaker impedance setting.  
(This display indicates an  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
8Ω-16Ω impedance setting.)  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
(This display indicates a 6Ω-  
less than 8Ω impedance  
setting.)  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
MULTI-ROOM  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Placing Your Speakers  
Proper speaker placement is essential to realize the best sound from your system. The diagram and tips  
given here are just a rough guide, for more information see pages 108 & 109. Also, it is very important for  
speaker placement to read the instructions that come with your speakers so please be sure to do so.  
Speaker placement  
If you have a multiple speaker arrangement the placement of the speakers is extremely important. To  
achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below. Make sure all speakers  
are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality. Some speakers are designed to be  
floor-standing but others benefit greatly from speaker stands which raise them off the floor. Be sure to  
read your speaker manuals for the best placement of the speakers.  
Center Speaker  
• When installing speakers near the  
memo  
TV, we recommend using  
magnetically shielded speakers to  
prevent distortion in the color of  
the TV screen. If you do not have  
magnetically shielded speakers  
and notice discoloration of the TV  
screen, place the speakers farther  
away from the TV.  
• Install the center speaker above or  
below the TV so that the sound of  
the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen.  
Front Speaker  
(L)  
Front Speaker  
(R)  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
Speaker (L)  
Surround  
Speaker (R)  
• THX recommends that if you have  
two surround back speakers place  
them close together.  
Surround Back  
Speaker (L)  
Surround Back  
Speaker (R)  
CAUTION:  
When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with suitable means.  
AC Power Cord  
Plug in the power cord to a wall outlet after you have finished hooking up the rest of your equipment.  
CAUTION!  
• Do not use any other power cord than the one supplied with this unit. (multi-voltage model only)  
• The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in  
regular use, e.g. when on vacation.  
AC Outlet [switched 100 W max] (European model only)  
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by this unit’s STANDBY/ON button. Total electrical  
power consumption of connected equipment should not exceed 100 W.  
CAUTION!  
• Do not connect appliances with high power consumption such as heaters, irons, or television sets to the  
AC OUTLET in order to avoid overheating or fire risk. This can cause the unit to malfunction.  
• DO NOT CONNECT A MONITOR OR TV SET TO THIS UNIT’S AC OUTLET.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Front Panel  
All the controls on the front panel are explained and/or referenced here. To open the front panel push  
gently on the lower third of the panel.  
2
9
10 11  
1
3
4 5  
6
7
8
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-D2011  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
STEREO/DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MULTI JOG  
MASTER VOLUME  
STATION TUNING  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
BAND  
CLASS  
SET UP  
RETURN  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
13  
14 15  
16  
17 18  
12  
STATION TUNING  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
TUNER  
EDIT  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
BAND  
CLASS  
SET UP  
RETURN  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
European model  
VIDEO INPUT  
21  
23  
19 20  
22  
24 25 16  
13  
14 15  
12  
STATION TUNING  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SET UP  
RETURN  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
multi-voltage  
model  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
21  
23  
19 20  
1 MULTI JOG dial  
22  
STEREO/DIRECT (see page 46): Switches the  
receiver into STEREO mode if it was in a  
different sound mode or toggles between  
DIRECT and STEREO mode.  
You can use this dial for many purposes. When  
you press the SET UP button (12), you can use  
it to perform SYSTEM SETUP operations;  
select a function (like a DVD) or a listening  
mode (like Dolby Pro logic ll) or do TUNER EDIT  
functions (in TUNER mode).  
DIRECT playback bypasses the tone controls  
and channel level for the most accurate  
reproduction of a program source.  
2 Listening mode buttons (see page 46-  
48)  
3 –OFF -ON button  
Press to switch the receiver between OFF and  
STANDBY mode or ON.  
There are two types of SURROUND modes:  
MOVIE: Press to put the receiver into MOVIE  
listening mode (see page 47).  
STANDBY/ON button  
Press to switch the receiver between ON and  
STANDBY mode.  
28  
MUSIC: Press to put the receiver into MUSIC  
En  
listening mode (see page 48).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
4 ENTER button  
15 SB CH MODE button (see pages 54)  
Use this button to turn the surround back  
channels ON/OFF/AUTO or switch the VIRTU-  
AL SURROUND BACK mode between ON/  
OFF/AUTO.  
Use this button to enter information concerning  
the SYSTEM SETUP, listening mode or the  
tuner.  
5 STANDBY indicator  
16 TUNER CONTROL buttons (See pages  
57-65)  
Lights when the receiver is in STANDBY mode.  
(Please note that this receiver consumes a  
small amount of power [0.7 W for the European  
model and 0.9 W for the multi-voltage model] in  
the standby mode.)  
BAND  
Press to select the AM or FM band.  
CLASS  
6 Remote sensor  
Press repeatedly to switch the preset station  
classes.  
Receives the signals from the remote control.  
7 Display (See page 33)  
SELECT  
Switches the –/+ buttons between station  
memory and frequency select modes.  
8 MCACC indicator (see pages 13-15, 50)  
Lights when the ACOUSTIC CAL EQ is on.  
(After the AUTO SURROUND SOUND SETUP  
has been completed the ACOUSTIC CAL EQ is  
set on and this display will light.)  
–/+  
Selects station memories or frequencies when  
using the tuner.  
9 MULTI CH IN button  
TUNER EDIT  
Use this button to select the component you  
have hooked up to the MULTI CH IN terminals  
(for example, a DVD-Audio player).  
Press to memorize and name a station for recall  
using the MULTI JOG and ENTER buttons.  
17 CHARACTER/SEARCH button (See  
pages 62-65)  
10 ACOUSTIC EQ button (see page 50, 99-  
101)  
Use to search for different program types in  
RDS mode.  
Press to switch on/off and select the type of  
acoustic calibration EQ.  
18 EON MODE button (see pages 64-65)  
Use to search for different programs that are  
transmitting traffic or news information (this  
search method is called EON).  
11 MASTER VOLUME dial  
Use to raise or lower the volume of the receiver.  
12 MULTI JOG CONTROL buttons  
19 PHONES jack  
SET UP  
Connect headphones for private listening (no  
sound will be heard through the speakers).  
Press to switch the SYSTEM SETUP mode.  
RETURN  
20 SPEAKERS (A/B) button  
Press to move back one step in the SYSTEM  
SETUP process.  
The use of this button depends on how the  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (see page 37) is set. If  
NORMAL SYSTEM is chosen this button  
toggles between A and OFF. If FRON Bi-AMP is  
chosen this button toggles between A+B and  
OFF. If SECOND ZONE is chosen this button  
toggles between A, B, A+B and OFF.  
13 SIGNAL SELECT button (see page 45)  
Press SIGNAL SELECT repeatedly to select one  
of the following:  
AUTO – If there are analog and digital signals  
input, the receiver automatically selects the  
digital signal.  
21 TONE control buttons (see page 52)  
TONE button  
DIGITAL – To select an optical or coaxial  
digital signal.  
This button switches between TONE ON and  
TONE BYPASS, which bypasses the tone  
circuitry.  
ANALOG – To select an analog signal.  
14 HI-BIT HI-SAMPLING button (see page  
53)  
BASS/TREBLE button  
Use to select whether the bass or treble will be  
adjusted.  
Use this button to switch the HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING mode on or off. Use to hear CD  
and DVD, as well as other digital soundtracks at  
a wider dynamic range, allowing for finer audio  
reproduction.  
–/+ buttons  
Use to adjust the frequency levels.  
22 SET UP MIC jack (see page 13)  
Plug in the set up mic here. This is very  
important in order to set up your system and  
get proper surround sound.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
23 VIDEO INPUT jacks (see page 18)  
DIGITAL IN  
24 MIDNIGHT button (see page 51)  
Switches the MIDNIGHT listening mode on or  
off (for all modes except THX CINEMA and  
MULTI CH IN).  
Digital input for connecting a game console,  
DVD player, video camera (etc.), that has an  
optical digital connection.  
25 LOUDNESS button (see page 51)  
Switches the LOUDNESS mode on or off (for  
all modes except THX CINEMA and MULTI CH  
IN).  
S-VIDEO  
Video input for connecting a portable DVD player,  
video camera (etc.), that has an S video out.  
RCA VIDEO / AUDIO (L/R)  
Video input for connecting a portable DVD  
player, video camera, etc. That has standard  
RCA video/audio outputs.  
Remote Control  
This page describes the buttons on the remote control used to operate the receiver.  
1 Remote Control Display Screen  
2 SOURCE button  
1
Use this button to turn on/off other compo-  
nents. You must input the preset code in order  
to use this function (see page 66-67).  
SETUP  
=
~
TV button  
This is a dedicated TV button. Use it to turn on/  
off your TV.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2
3
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
3 MULTI CONTROL buttons  
These buttons are the basic controls that  
switch the mode of the receiver and the  
remote control, which allows you to control  
your other components.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
!
@
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
4
–
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
TV CONT: Press so that the remote control can  
operate the TV control commands.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
5
6
7
#
$
4 Number buttons  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
These can be used for many purposes depend-  
ing on the mode of the remote control.  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
When in receiver mode the buttons operate as  
below:  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
8
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
DIMMER button (see page 56)  
Use to adjust the brightness of the receiver's  
display.  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
%
^
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
LOUDNESS button (see page 51)  
Switches the LOUDNESS mode on or off (for  
all modes except THX CINEMA and MULTI CH  
IN).  
9
0
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
&
*
(
)
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
MODE  
SURROUND  
TONE button (see page 52)  
This button switches between TONE ON and  
TONE BYPASS, which bypasses the tone  
circuitry.  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
ENTER  
Î
_
-
BASS/TREBLE buttons (see page 52)  
Use to select whether the bass or treble will be  
adjusted.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
(+/–) buttons (see page 52)  
8 Command button for other components  
(see pages 70-71)  
Use to adjust the TONE level, effect level and  
channel level as well as make Dolby Pro Logic  
II MUSIC parameter settings.  
Use these buttons to control other components  
you selected with the MULTI CONTROL  
buttons. You must input the preset code in  
order use this function (see page 66-67).  
EFFECT/CH SEL. button  
Switches between the diffeerent channels so  
you can add volume individually to each  
channel with the + and – buttons. Also selects  
EFFECT mode of PIONEER original sound  
modes and Dolby Pro Logic II MUSIC parame-  
ter settings. You can then use the + and –  
buttons to make these adjustments.  
9 TV CONTROL buttons  
The following buttons are used to control the TV  
only and can be used once they are preset to  
control your TV.  
TV INPUT: Press to select the input source for  
the TV.  
TV CH +/– : Use these buttons to change the  
channel of the TV.  
TV VOL +/– : Press to control the volume of  
the TV.  
SIGNAL SELECT button (see page 45)  
Press SIGNAL SELECT repeatedly to select one  
of the following:  
AUTO – If there are analog and digital signals  
input, the receiver automatically selects the  
digital signal.  
0 Listening mode buttons (see page 46-  
48)  
SURROUND buttons (MOVIE, MUSIC, | \  
& ENTER):  
DIGITAL – To select an optical or coaxial  
MOVIE: Press to put the receiver into MOVIE  
listening mode (see page 47).  
MUSIC: Press to put the receiver into MUSIC  
listening mode (see page 48).  
digital signal.  
ANALOG – To select an analog signal.  
DIGITAL NR (DNR) button (see page 50)  
Switches the DIGITAL NR on or off.  
| \: Use to select the MOVIE or MUSIC  
listening mode.  
VIDEO SELECT button (see page 56)  
Use to toggle between the different video input  
possibilities.  
ENTER: Use this button to enter information  
concerning the listening modes.  
STEREO/DIRECT: Switches the receiver into  
STEREO mode if it was in a different sound  
mode or toggles between DIRECT and  
STEREO mode.  
HI-BIT button (see page 53)  
Use this button to switch the HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING on or off. Use to hear CD and  
DVD, as well as other digital soundtracks at a  
wider dynamic range, allowing for finer audio  
reproduction.  
DIRECT playback bypasses the tone controls  
and channel level for the most accurate  
reproduction of a program source.  
5 SYSTEM SETUP button  
Use for all system setups, including the  
speaker and sound systems. For more informa-  
tion see. “Setting up for Surround Sound“  
starting on page 36. For a DVD player use this  
button to bring up the DVD menu and for a  
tuner use this button in the same way as the  
TUNER EDIT button.  
- SB CH MODE button (see pages 54)  
Use this button to turn the surround back  
channels ON/OFF/AUTO or switch the VIRTU-  
AL SURROUND BACK mode between ON/  
OFF/AUTO.  
= SYSTEM OFF button (see pages 82-83)  
This button turns off components in two ways.  
First, when pressed it will turn off all PIONEER  
components. Secondly, any component that  
has programmed into the SYSTEM OFF  
settings will be turned off.  
6 5˜∞˜2˜3˜ENTER buttons  
These buttons can be used for a variety of  
operations in the SYSTEM SETUP menu.  
These buttons are used to control the menus  
for other components when in those modes  
(DVD, digital TV tuner, satellite tuner, cable  
tuner, etc.). In TUNER mode, they can select a  
station and/or a frequency.  
For example: If you programmed power off in  
the SYSTEM OFF settings for your TV and VCR,  
pressing the SYSTEM OFF button will turn off  
these components even if they are not  
PIONEER products.  
7 AUDIO button  
Use to switch the audio tracks of a DVD when  
in DVD mode.  
~
RECEIVER (STANDBY/ON) button  
Press to turn power of the receiver on or to  
standby (off).  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
! MULTI OPERATION button  
Use this button to start the MULTI OPERATION  
mode. See page 80-81 for how to program and  
use the MULTI OPERATION mode.  
@ RECEIVER button  
Use this button to switch the remote control  
into receiver mode in order to get certain  
receiver functions or do receiver setups.  
# TOP MENU/GUIDE button  
Use to find stations or menus on a digital TV  
tuner. For a DVD player use this button to bring  
up the DVD menu.  
$ RETURN button  
When you are in a receiver setup operation this  
button will go back one step in the SYSTEM  
SETUP procedure. When you are using your  
DVD menu screen this button acts the same as  
the DVD player's "RETURN" button. When you  
are using cable tuners, satellite tuners or digital  
TV tuners this button will either exit you from  
the menu screen or act like a "RETURN" button  
above, depending on the maker of the unit.  
% INPUT button  
Press to select an input source. The button will  
cycle through all the possible sources.  
^ VOLUME (+/–) buttons  
Use to raise or lower the volume of the receiver.  
& MIDNIGHT button (see page 51)  
Switches the MIDNIGHT listening mode on or  
off (for all modes except THX CINEMA and  
MULTI CH IN).  
* MUTE button  
Press to mute or restore the volume.  
( MULTI CH INPUT button (see page 53)  
Use this button to select the component you  
have hooked up to the MULTI CH IN terminals  
(for example, a DVD-Audio player).  
) ACOUSTIC EQ button (see pages 99-  
101)  
Press to switch on/off and select the type of  
acoustic calibration EQ.  
_ REMOTE SETUP button.  
Use to customize the remote control functions  
and the remote control itself. (See “Setting Up  
the Remote Control to Control Other Compo-  
nents“ starting on page 66).  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Display  
All the display information is explained and/or referenced here.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
dB  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
DIGITAL  
RF  
DTS ES EX  
MPEG AAC  
STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
SB CH  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
AUTO  
MUSIC  
OFF  
L
C
R
LFE  
SP A B  
S RS  
LS  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
1 SIGNAL SELECT indicators  
it lights when the station you are currently  
tuned to carries the EON data service.  
Light to indicate the input signal you selected.  
AUTO: Lights when the receiver is set to select  
the input signal automatically.  
DIGITAL: Lights when digital audio signals are  
selected.  
8
9
Volume level indicator  
Hi-BIT/SAMPLING indicator  
Lights when a HI-BIT/SAMPLING mode is on.  
ANALOG: Lights when analog signals are  
selected.  
10 DSP indicators  
MOVIE: Lights when a MOVIE mode is  
selected. When a DSP MOVIE mode is select-  
ed DSP will light with a box around it.  
2 Digital format indicators  
PRO LOGIC II: Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II  
processing.  
MUSIC: Lights when a MUSIC mode is  
selected. When a DSP MUSIC mode is select-  
ed DSP will light with a box around it.  
NEO:6: Lights during NEO:6 processing.  
2 DIGITAL: Lights when a Dolby Digital signal is  
detected.  
11 Program Format indicators  
DTS: Lights when a DTS signal is detected.  
ES: Lights when playing back a DTS ES signal.  
EX: Lights when playing back a Dolby Digital EX  
signal.  
For Dolby Digital or DTS sources: These  
indicators change according to which channels  
are active in the source. When all three LS (left  
surround), S (surround) and RS (right surround)  
light at the same time it means a source with a  
6.1 channel playback flag is being used.  
STEREO: Lights during two-channel playback.  
3
4
5
6
7
LOUDNESS indicator  
Lights when LOUDNESS is on.  
L – Left front channel.  
C – Center channel.  
R – Right front channel.  
LS – Left surround channel.  
S – Surround channel or Surround back channel.  
RS – Right surround channel.  
LFE – Low Frequency Effects channel.  
MIDNIGHT indicator  
Lights when MIDNIGHT is on.  
TONE indicator  
Lights when the TONE control is on.  
DNR indicator  
Lights when DIGITAL NR is on.  
‡ – Lights when LFE signal is input.  
TUNER indicators  
STEREO: Lights when an FM stereo broadcast  
is received in the auto stereo mode.  
12 SB CH indicators  
Light to indicate the status of the surround  
back channels.  
MONO: Lights when the tuner is set to receive  
FM broadcasts and when MPX mode is selected.  
AUTO – Lights when the SB CH MODE or  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode is set to  
AUTO.  
TUNED: Lights when a broadcast is received.  
RF ATT (European model only) Lights when  
the RF ATT is on (see p.57).  
:
ON – Lights when the SB CH MODE or  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode is set to  
ON.  
RDS (European model only) Lights when an  
:
RDS broadcast is received.  
OFF – Lights when the SB CH MODE or  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode is set to  
OFF.  
EON o (European model only)  
:
EON lights  
33  
when it has been set. The dot indicator next to  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Back Panel  
All the terminals on the back panel are explained and/or referenced here.  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
AM LOOP  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
SAT)  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
IN  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
BACK  
R
FRONT  
L
L
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
R
L
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
12  
13 14 15  
1 DIGITAL IN terminals (see page 22)  
Use these terminals to input the signal from a  
DVD, CD player or any other kind of digital  
player. To be able to play Dolby Digital and  
other surround soundtracks you need to make  
digital connections. To do this use the digital  
terminals here. If you don't connect as per the  
default settings (see page 23) you need to  
complete "Assigning the Digital Inputs" (see  
page 91).  
5 MONITOR OUT 1 & 2 terminals  
(connect a TV or monitor here, see page  
16)  
Use either of these terminals to output the  
video signal to your TV(s), video projector(s) or  
monitor(s). The on-screen displays to setup the  
receiver will only be output through MONITOR  
OUT 1.  
6 PRE OUT analog terminals (connect an  
amplifier here, see page 78)  
2 DIGITAL OUT terminals (see page 22)  
Use these terminals to output a digital signal to  
a DVD-R, CD-R, MD recorder or any other kind  
of digital recorder.  
Use these terminals to output the audio signal  
from this amplifier to a different amplifier if  
that's how you choose to set up your system.  
7 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
terminals  
3 CONTROL IN/OUT terminal (see page  
79)  
Use these terminals to output the video signal  
from the COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals to  
your TV. See #16 for more information.  
You can use this jack to hook up other  
PIONEER equipment, that has a CONTROL  
terminal, so that you can control them all by  
pointing the remote control(s) at one remote  
sensor.  
8 SPEAKERS terminals (see page 25)  
Use these terminals to connect speakers to the  
receiver. The FRONT, CENTER and SUR-  
ROUND terminals are for the main speaker  
system and the SURROUND BACK speakers  
can be set to either the main system or the  
SECOND ZONE. See page 37 to set the  
SURROUND BACK speakers.  
4 Radio antenna terminals (see page 24)  
Hook up antennas for the radio tuner built into  
the receiver here.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
(multi-voltage  
model only)  
(multi-voltage  
model only)  
10  
9
(European  
model only)  
7
8
11  
TWO VOLTAGE SELECTORS  
AC IN  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
AC OUTLET  
P
B
R
230  
220V  
240V  
110V 120−127V  
P
110V  
120-127V  
220V  
230-240V  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
P
P
B
R
SWITCHED 100W MAX  
SURROUND BACK /  
SPEAKERS  
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
Å
R
L
R
L
R
L
ª
ª
Y
P
P
B
R
·
·
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
16  
9 Voltage Selector (multi-voltage model  
only)  
14 Video components input/output  
terminals  
Use to match the voltage coming into the  
receiver with the voltage in your country or  
region (see page 3).  
Input/output signals from your video compo-  
nents (DVD, VCR, TV tuners, SAT tuners, etc.)  
here. (see pages 17-19).  
10 AC IN (multi-voltage model only)  
15 MULTI CH IN terminals (see page 21)  
Use these terminals to input a multichannel  
surround signal (for example, a DVD-Audio  
signal) in an analog fashion. These are analog  
jacks.  
Hook up the power cord to this terminal.  
11 AC OUTLET (European model only)  
(switched, 100 W max)  
Hook up an external component to the power  
supply of this receiver. Only do this with audio  
or video components being used in this system  
and never hook up heavy equipment (like TVs,  
heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, etc.) to  
this receiver.  
16 COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals (see  
pages 16-17)  
Use these terminals to hook up the video  
connections of your video components with  
this high quality method. Your components will  
have to have the terminals as well to take  
advantage of this kind of connection. If you  
don't connect as per the default settings (see  
page 16) you need to complete "Assigning the  
Component Video Inputs" (see page 92).  
12 USB AUDIO IN terminal  
Use this terminal to connect a PC to this  
receiver (see pages 76-77).  
13 Audio input/output terminals (connect  
analog components here, see page 20)  
Use these terminals to input/output the audio  
signal from analog components (like a cassette  
deck or turntable). These are analog jacks.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
To ensure the best possible surround sound, complete the following setup operations. Some of these are the  
same (and take precedence over) the settings you made in the Easy Setup Guide, so consider if the ones you  
made at that time were adequate. If you feel they were, move on to the next setting in this section.  
These setup operations use on-screen displays (OSDs) on your TV to display the settings and choices so be sure  
your TV and receiver are properly hooked up and that your TV is set to this receiver. You need to connect the  
setup mic to the front panel of the receiver so that it can measure the sound and ensure the proper settings. For  
more information on the mic hookup see page 13. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the  
remote control to navigate the OSDs on your TV. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG dial and ENTER  
button, and look at the display, on the Front Panel.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV. Press  
SETUP  
the RECEIVER button on the remote  
control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
Make sure your TV is connected and set to the video input  
the receiver is using.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
The menu possibilities appear on your TV.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
3 SURROUND SETUP should be selected. If  
it isn’t use the 5∞ buttons to select it.  
Press the ENTER button.  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
3-4  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to navigate through  
the menus. When you have the setting  
you want in a particular menu, press  
ENTER.  
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
3-4 2  
In each mode, the current settings are displayed. We suggest  
you do a basic system setup for surround sound when you  
first hook up the receiver. That gets it out of the way and you  
won't need to do it again unless you change your home set  
up (by adding new speakers, etc.). To do a basic setup use  
the SURRBACK menu if necessary and then choose either  
the AUTO SETTING, QUICK or NORMAL setup procedure and  
complete that. You don’t need to do all three as they accom-  
plish the same ends and we recommend the AUTO SETTING  
method.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
To do a more advanced setup for surround sound see  
EXPERT setup starting on page 95.  
SURRBACK (Surround Back) SYSTEM (See page 37)  
Use to choose options for your surround back speakers.  
System Setup  
AUTO SETTING (See page 13-15)  
See the Easy Setup Guide Part 2 for an explanation of this  
setup.  
3
[1. Surround Setup  
[2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
]
]
]
[5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
QUICK setup (See page 38)  
[Exit  
]
Use to setup your surround sound system in the minimum  
amount of time.  
NORMAL setup (See page 39)  
Use this method to manually adjust all the surround sound  
functions.  
1.Surround Setup  
[ SurrBack System ]  
4
[ Auto Setting  
[ Quick  
]
]
]
]
]
EXPERT setup (See pages 95-103)  
Use these settings to fine tune your surround sound and  
make it more personalized.  
[ Normal  
[ Expert  
[ Exit  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (Surround Back System)  
This setup selects how your surround back system will be used. If you want to use it for surround back speakers  
in your main speaker system choose NORMAL SYSTEM. In this case you won’t have any B (or secondary)  
speaker system as these speakers fill that role also for the VSX-D2011. If you want to use your surround back  
speakers in a different room choose SECOND ZONE. Alternatively, you can choose the FRONT BI-AMP setting,  
in order to deliver more power to the front speakers. If starting fresh, complete steps 1-3 in page 36.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
8
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
1 SURRBACK SYSTEM should be  
selected. If it isn’t use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-3  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
surround back system setting. Press  
the ENTER button.  
1-3  
Choose from:  
NORMAL SYSTEM: if you want to use these speaker  
terminals for your surround back speakers in your main  
speaker system (referred to as the A speaker system).  
SECOND ZONE: if you want to use the these speaker  
terminals for an independent speaker system (referred to  
as speaker system B).  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
FRONT BI-AMP: Choose this setting if you want to deliver  
more power to your front speakers. This setting will use  
your surround back speaker terminals so you will only be  
able to get 5.1 channel playback. Also, you will have to bi-  
wire your speakers to do this (see page 74).  
3 EXIT should be selected. Press the  
ENTER button.  
1.Surround Setup  
[ SurrBack System ]  
1
2
3
[ Auto Setting  
[ Quick  
[ Normal  
[ Expert  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
You will return to the SURROUND SETUP menu display.  
Next, proceed to either AUTO SETTING (see page 13),  
QUICK (on the next page) or NORMAL (see page 39).  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
start over from step 1.  
SurrBack System  
[ Normal System  
[ Secound Zone  
[ Front Bi-Amp  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
SurrBack System  
[ Normal System  
[ Secound Zone  
[ Front Bi-Amp  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
QUICK setup  
This simple and quick setup method allows you to make all the necessary settings manually with the minimum  
of hassle. If you did the AUTO SURROUND SOUND SETUP method on pages 13-15 you don’t need to do this  
setup. You must have front and surround speakers hooked up to use this setup.  
You only need to do these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers, etc.). If starting fresh, complete steps 1-3 in page 36.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select QUICK.  
Press the ENTER button.  
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-4  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV.  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to navigate  
through the QUICK setup menus. When  
you get a menu you want to adjust  
press ENTER.  
1
3
¡
1-4  
3 In a menu use the 5∞ buttons to select  
the different settings. When you have  
the setting you want in a particular  
menu, press ENTER.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
Make the adjustments that match your home setup  
using the buttons described above.  
SUBWOOFER setting:  
If you connected a subwoofer select YES, if you didn’t  
select NO.  
CENTER SP setting:  
If you connected a CENTER speaker select YES, if you  
didn’t select NO.  
SURRBACK SP setting:  
If you connected a SURROUND speaker(s) select YES, if  
you didn’t select NO.  
1.Surround Setup  
[ SurrBack System ]  
1
[ Auto Setting  
[ Quick  
]
]
]
]
]
[ Normal  
[ Expert  
[ Exit  
ROOM SIZE setting:  
Tell the receiver your room size so it can equalize the  
speakers properly. Use the chart below for an approximate  
definition of the settings.  
QUICK  
2
4
Subwoofer  
Center SP  
SurrBack SP  
Room size  
[ YES]  
[ YES]  
[ YES]  
SMALL: 2.5 m by 3.5 m  
MEDIUM: 4 m by 5 m  
LARGE: 5.5 m by 7.5 m  
LISTENING POSITION setting:  
[
Medium  
]
Listening Position  
[ Center ]  
[Exit]  
This setting establishes where your ideal listening position  
is. Choose from the three possibilities following the guide  
below.  
FRONT: your listening position is closer to the front  
speakers.  
CENTER: your listening position is equidistant to the  
front and surround speakers.  
REAR: your listening position is closer to the surround  
speakers.  
QUICK  
Subwoofer  
Center SP  
SurrBack SP  
Room size  
Listening Position  
[ Front  
[ YES ]  
[ YES ]  
[ YES ]  
[
Small  
]
]
[Exit  
]
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the EXIT.  
Press the ENTER button.  
You will return to the SURROUND SETUP menu display.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
start over from step 1.  
If you do the QUICK setup after  
the AUTO SURROUND SOUND  
SETUP the former will replace the  
latter.  
memo  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
NORMAL setup  
This is the manual method to setup your sound parameters for surround sound. It is more exact than the QUICK  
setup and should give you finer surround sound. You don’t need to do this, however, if you did the AUTO  
SURROUND SOUND SETUP method on pages 13-15. If you feel the settings in the AUTO SURROUND SOUND  
SETUP do not suit your personal tastes, the settings you input here will override them and allow you to adjust  
the parameters manually. AUTO SURROUND SOUND SETUP with the microphone may not properly assess the  
size of your speakers if there is background noise, from an air conditioner or refrigerator, for example. If  
necessary try different possible settings here.  
You only need to do these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers, etc.). If starting fresh, complete steps 1-3 in page 36.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
NORMAL. Press the ENTER button.  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV.  
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-2  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to navigate  
through the NORMAL setup menus.  
When you have the setting you want in  
a particular menu, press ENTER.  
1
3
¡
1-2  
In each mode, the current settings are displayed. We  
suggest you adjust all these settings when you first hook  
up the receiver. That gets them out of the way and you  
won't need to return to this setting mode unless you  
change your home set up by adding new speakers (etc.).  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
SPEAKER SETTING (See pages 40-41)  
Use to specify the type and number of speakers you  
connected.  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
CHANNEL LEVEL (See page 42)  
Use to balance the volumes of your different speakers. This  
is also necessary for the most realistic surround sound.  
CHANNEL DELAY (See page 43)  
1.Surround Setup  
[ SurrBack System ]  
Use to select the distance settings for each set of speak-  
ers. You must add distance settings to all your speakers  
for the most realistic surround sound. Adding a slight delay  
to some speakers enhances sound separation and is  
particularly important for achieving a surround sound  
effect. You need to figure out the distance from your  
listening position to your speakers to add the proper delay.  
1
2
[ Auto Setting  
[ Quick  
]
]
]
]
]
[ Normal  
[ Expert  
[ Exit  
See the next four pages for more information on these  
settings.  
Normal  
[ Speaker Setting  
[ Channel Level  
[ Channel Delay  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
SPEAKER SETTING  
The information below shows you how to select the correct settings for the type and number of speakers you  
connected. Most importantly, you need to decide how to route the sound for all the speakers you connected. To  
do this select the size of the front, center, surround and surround back speakers (if you hooked them up). It is  
important to make these settings as accurately as possible or, in some cases, you may not get the full  
soundtrack from a disc.  
Use the information below to complete the steps that follow and set up the receiver to match the speakers you  
have hooked up.  
If starting fresh, complete steps 1-2 in page 39.  
FRONT (default setting is SMALL)  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the subwoofer. Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively or if you did not connect a subwoofer. (If you select SMALL for the front speakers the  
subwoofer will automatically be switched YES. Also, the center and surround speakers cannot be set to  
LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.)  
CENTER (default setting is SMALL)  
• Select LARGE if your speaker will reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
• Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
• If you did not connect a center speaker, choose NO. In this case, the center channel is output from the  
front speakers.  
SURROUND (default setting is SMALL)  
• Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
• Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
• If you did not connect surround speakers choose NO. In this case, the sound of the surround channels is  
output from the front and center speakers.  
• If the front speakers are set to SMALL, the surround speakers will automatically be set to SMALL.  
SURROUND BACK (default setting is SMALL X2)  
If you chose SECOND ZONE or FRONT BI-AMP in SURRBACK SYSTEM on page 37, or if you chose  
NO for SURROUND SPEAKERS, you won’t be able to choose this setting.  
• Select the number of surround back speakers you have. You can choose one speaker, two, or none.  
• If you select one speaker, make sure to hook it up to the left surround back terminal.  
• Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
• Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
• If you did not connect surround back speakers choose NO.  
• If the front speakers or the surround speakers are set to SMALL, the surround back speakers will automati-  
cally be set to SMALL.  
• If you choose THX in step 2 then the surround back speakers can only be set to SMALL (X1 or X2), or NO.  
SUBWOOFER (default setting is YES)  
• Leave it selected if you connected a subwoofer.  
• If you selected SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be set to on (you won’t be  
able to choose NO or PLUS).  
• If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO. In this case, the bass frequencies are output from the front  
or surround speakers.  
• Choose the PLUS setting if you want stronger reproduction of deep bass sounds.  
• If you select PLUS the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are all  
routed to the subwoofer.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
1 SPEAKER SETTING should be selected.  
If it isn’t use the 5∞ buttons to select  
it. Press the ENTER button.  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-6  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV.  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
speaker system setting.  
1-6  
Choose from:  
FREE: to sets all the speakers  
THX: All speakers are set to SMALL and the  
SUBWOOFER to YES. You can select the number of  
surround back speakers.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
For FREE, select it and press ENTER. Then go to step 3.  
For THX, select it and press ENTER. Then go to step 4 but  
you only need to set the number of surround back  
speakers.  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
3 With the 5∞ buttons choose the  
speakers that you want to set. Press  
the ENTER button.  
Normal  
1
2
3
[ Speaker Setting  
[ Channel Level  
[ Channel Delay  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
The setup possibilities appear on your TV.  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to choose the  
number (YES or NO, X1 or X2) and the  
size (LARGE or SMALL) for each set of  
speakers. Press ENTER.  
Speaker Setting  
[ Free ]  
PLUS is also a possibility for the SUBWOOFER.  
If you selected THX in step 2, you only need to set the  
number of surround back speakers (X1, X2, or NO).  
[ THX  
]
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[Exit]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
X
[SMALL 2]  
[
YES  
]
5 Repeat steps 3 & 4 for all speakers  
channels.  
Speaker Setting  
[ Free ]  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
[ THX  
]
press ENTER.  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[Exit]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL 2]  
YES  
Next, proceed to CHANNEL LEVEL next page.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
start over from step 1.  
X
[
]
Speaker Setting  
[ Free ]  
4
6
memo  
[ THX  
]
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[Exit]  
[LARGE]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem  
logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and leave the  
subwoofer selected. This may not, however, yield the best  
bass results. Depending on the size and shape of your room  
you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass  
due to what is called low frequency cancellations. If you have a  
subwoofer, listen to the bass response with the front speakers  
set to LARGE and SMALL alternately and let your ears judge  
which sounds best.  
X
[SMALL 2]  
[
YES  
]
Speaker Setting  
[ Free ]  
[ THX  
]
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[Exit ]  
[LARGE]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
The safest option is to route all the bass sounds to the  
subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.  
X
[SMALL 2]  
[
YES  
]
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
CHANNEL LEVEL (channel balance)  
The following steps show you how to balance the sound output level of your speakers. Proper speaker balance  
is essential for obtaining high quality surround sound. If continuing from SPEAKER SETTING go to step 1. If  
starting fresh, complete steps 1-2 on page 39.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
1 CHANNEL LEVEL should be selected. If  
it isn’t use the 5∞ buttons to select  
and press ENTER.  
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
2 There are two ways to set the  
CHANNEL LEVEL: MANUAL or AUTO.  
Select a setting mode with the 5∞  
buttons and press ENTER.  
1-5  
STANDBY/ON  
Test tones will be output.  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
WARNING : Be prepared! The test tones are output at  
a high volume level.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
MASTER VOLUME rotates to the reference position (0 dB)  
and the display on the receiver flashes TEST TONE. After a  
few seconds the test tone is output.  
MANUAL: move the test tone manually and adjust the  
channel level.  
Normal  
1
2
AUTO: the test tone moves by itself and you adjust the  
levels.  
[ Speaker Setting ]  
[ Channel Level  
[ Channel Delay  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
3 Adjust the speaker level with the  
below instructions for the method you  
chose.  
Channel Level  
Test Tone  
[Manual]  
[Auto]  
Exit  
[
]
Adjust the channel level from –10 dB to +10 dB in 0.5 dB  
increments.  
The default setting is 0 dB.  
3
Channel Level  
Channel Level  
In MANUAL (manual test tone) mode  
To switch the test tone between each speaker use the  
5∞ buttons and push ENTER. Adjust the level of each  
speaker using the 5∞ buttons and ENTER. When done go  
L
+1. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-3. 5dB  
-1. 5dB  
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
L
+1. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-3. 5dB  
-1. 5dB  
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Front  
Center  
Front  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
R
R
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[[+10. 0  
dB  
[[+10. 0  
dB  
[
Exit  
]
Set OK =Push Enter  
to step 4.  
In AUTO (automatic test tone) mode  
in MANUAL setting  
in AUTO setting  
This mode switches the test tone between each speaker  
automatically. The test tone output cycles through the  
speakers in the following order:  
Channel Level  
4
L
+1. 5dB  
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-3. 5dB  
-1. 5dB  
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
FRONT  
L
FRONT  
R
SURROUND  
R
R
CENTER  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SURROUND  
L
SURRBACK  
L
SURRBACK  
R
[[+10. 0  
dB  
[
Exit  
]
Adjust the level of each speaker using the 5∞ buttons as  
the test tone is emitted and wait for it to move to the next  
speaker . When done go to step 5.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
you need to complete the procedure and start over from  
step 1.  
memo  
• If your subwoofer has a volume control, set  
it to the middle position before doing these  
operations.  
4 When you have the levels you want  
press ENTER. EXIT should be selected  
(if it isn’t select it with the 5∞  
buttons).  
• If you are using a Sound Pressure Level  
(SPL) meter take the readings from your  
main listening position and adjust the level  
of each speaker to 75dB SPL (C-weighting/  
slow reading).  
• The volume of the subwoofer test tone  
tends to sound lower than it actually is. You  
may need to adjust the level after testing  
your system with an actual soundtrack.  
5 Press ENTER.  
42  
Next, proceed to CHANNEL DELAY next page.  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
CHANNEL DELAY  
Adding a slight delay to some speakers is necessary to achieve proper sound depth, separation as well as an  
effective surround sound effect. You need to figure out the distance from your listening position to your  
speakers to add the proper delay. The following steps show you how to set the delay time for each channel by  
specifying the distances from your listening position to each speaker. Once you specify the speaker distances  
(or it is done automatically in the Easy Setup Guide Part 2), the receiver calculates the correct delay times  
automatically. If continuing from CHANNEL LEVEL go to step 1. If starting fresh, complete steps 1-2 on page 39.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
1 The CHANNEL DELAY should be  
selected. If it isn’t use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
6
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
2 Select each speaker channel with the  
1-5 6  
5∞ buttons and press ENTER.  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to add or subtract  
the distance in feet that the speaker is  
from your normal listening position.  
Press the ENTER button.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
Adjust the speaker distance in 0.1 m increments from 0.1  
to 9.0 m.  
The default setting is 2.0 m.  
4 Repeat steps 2 & 3 for all speaker  
channels.  
Normal  
1
[ Speaker Setting ]  
[ Channel Level  
[ Channel Delay  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
start over from step 1.  
Channel Delay  
L
2
6 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button to  
leave the SYSTEM SETUP mode.  
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
3. 0m  
2. 7m  
3. 0m  
2. 7m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
2. 4m  
3. 3m  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Exit ]  
Channel Delay  
3
5
L
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
3. 0m  
2. 7m  
3. 0m  
3. 0m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
2. 4m  
3. 3m  
Center  
R
Front  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Exit ]  
Channel Delay  
L
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
3. 0m  
2. 7m  
3. 0m  
3. 0m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
2. 4m  
3. 3m  
Center  
R
Front  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Exit ]  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback  
The following instructions show you how to play sound sources with the VSX-D2011.  
Before doing so be sure to complete the setup procedures described in the "Easy Setup Guide Part 2" (starting  
on page 13) or "Setting Up for Surround Sound" (starting on page 36). This is particularly important to achieve a  
surround sound effect with Dolby Digital or DTS sources.  
1 Turn on the power of the playback  
component.  
SETUP  
2 Press the –OFF-ON  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
STANDBY  
indicator  
button to put the receiver  
in ON mode. Press the  
STANDBY/ON button to  
turn on the receiver.  
2
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
STANDBY/ON  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
STANDBY  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
Be sure that the STANDBY indicator  
turns off on the front panel.  
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL (or  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
INPUT) on the remote control to  
select the source you want to  
playback.  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
3
6
Choose the type of signal input with the SIGNAL  
SELECT button.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
See the next page for more details, if necessary.  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
4 Choose a LISTENING MODE one of  
two ways.  
MODE  
SURROUND  
4
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
For SURROUND modes: press MOVIE or MUSIC, use  
the | \ buttons to select the mode you want and  
press ENTER.  
Î
For STEREO/DIRECT: for press the button for that  
mode.  
On the front panel, use the MOVIE or MUSIC buttons  
and the MULTI JOG dial. Press the button of the mode  
type you want and then use the dial to cycle through  
the possibilities. Press ENTER.  
2 4  
4
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-D2011  
See “SURROUND Modes,” on pages 47–48 for details  
on which modes are available and in which situations  
they are designed to be used.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
STEREO/DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MULTI JOG  
MASTER VOLUME  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
5 Start playback of the component  
you selected in step 3.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
6 Adjust the volume by using the  
VOLUME buttons on the remote  
control. On the front panel use the  
MASTER VOLUME dial.  
3
6
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input  
This button selects the type of input signal, ANALOG or DIGITAL, sent to the receiver. You need to take special  
care to switch to the appropriate input when necessary. For example, the switch would have to be on DIGITAL  
to hear digital sources like Dolby Digital or DTS but it would have to be on analog to record from the ANALOG  
out jacks on the receiver. The default setting is AUTO (which chooses digital over analog when both are  
available but goes with whatever is available) for: DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD, CDR/TAPE1. The default setting  
is ANALOG for: VCR1/DVR, VCR2, MD/TAPE2, TUNER, PHONO. The default setting is DIGITAL for USB.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SELECT on the front panel) button to  
select the input signal corresponding  
to the format of the source  
component.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
Each press switches the signal in the order below:  
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
2
DISC  
9
0
AUTO  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
D
RECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
SELECT  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2
memo  
•
When DIGITAL signal is selected, 2 DIGITAL lights when a Dolby Digital signal is input; DTS lights when a  
DTS signal is input.  
•
•
If no digital inputs are assigned (see page 91) you can only choose ANALOG in the SIGNAL SELECT.  
Because the audio signal from a karaoke microphone and LDs are recorded with analog audio only, they are  
not output from the digital outputs. Set SIGNAL SELECT to ANALOG to listen to these formats.  
When an LD with DTS is played back with the SIGNAL SELECT set in ANALOG, digital noise caused by  
playing back the DTS signal directly (with no decoding) is output. To prevent noise, you need to make digital  
connections (See pages 22 & 23) and set SIGNAL SELECT to AUTO or DIGITAL.  
Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with  
your DVD player.  
•
•
•
This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz and 96kHz sampling  
frequency), and DTS digital signal formats. If your source is not one of these select ANALOG for playback.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening Modes  
The three listening mode types on the receiver are explained here (to select listening modes see page 44).  
The kind of playback you can get in the three modes depends on what kind of a source (DVD, etc.) you are  
using. The basic distinction is between 2 channel sources and multichannel sources. The MOVIE and MUSIC  
modes that are available to you will also differ according to your source and which SB CH MODE you choose.  
This is explained below as well.  
For home theater the MOVIE and MUSIC listening modes are designed to deliver realistic and powerful  
multichannel surround sound that recreates the movie theater or concert experience. The first four MOVIE  
modes (THX CINEMA, 2PRO LOGIC II (MOVIE), 2PRO LOGIC, NEO:6 CINEMA) and first two MUSIC modes  
(2PRO LOGIC II MUSIC, NEO:6 MUSIC) incorporate pure decoding of the signal. That is they present it as it  
was recorded in the sound studio. The other modes are DSP modes. They add some type of effect to the signal.  
You may need to experiment with these modes to see which suit your home system and personal tastes.  
The MUSIC and STEREO modes are designed to be used with music sources but some MUSIC modes are also  
suitable for film soundtracks. Again, try different modes with various soundtracks to see which you like but you  
must choose one of the MOVIE and MUSIC listening modes in order to get surround sound.  
Depending on your setup, in STEREO mode only the front two speakers, and sometimes the subwoofer (if you  
have one), are used.  
STEREO modes  
When a source is played in this mode, it plays through just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your  
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed  
to stereo.  
STEREO  
In STEREO mode the audio plays according to the surround setup settings and you can still use ACOUSTIC  
CALIBRATION EQ, DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS, HI-BIT HI-SAMPLING mode, and TONE Control  
functions.  
DIRECT  
In DIRECT mode, the audio bypasses all types of signal processing to remain as close to the source audio  
quality as possible.  
If you switch on ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ, DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS, HI-BIT HI-  
SAMPLING mode, and TONE Control when DIRECT is selected, the receiver automatically  
switches to STEREO.  
memo  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MOVIE modes (SURROUND mode)  
The MOVIE mode is a newly designed system for enhancing movie soundtracks and other audio-visual sources  
that optimizes its effects in accordance with your source, SB CH MODE and speaker configuration. The first four  
modes (THX CINEMA, 2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE, 2PRO LOGIC, NEO:6 CINEMA) are for pure decoding of  
multichannel sound sources (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS). With these modes the receiver will  
automatically employ the format of the sound source (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS) and display it on  
receiver. With two channel sources these first four modes will create surround channels. Next, there are six  
PIONEER original sound modes that use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to create different types of sound  
environments as described below.  
THX CINEMA  
THX is a set of technical standards created by Lucasfilm Ltd. These standards were designed to emulate a  
film sound stage and thus reproduce, with the greatest possible accuracy, the soundtrack intended by the  
filmmakers.  
2PL II MOVIE (2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE)*  
This mode gives 5.1 channel surround sound. It is suitable for movies, especially those recorded in Dolby  
Surround. The channel separation and movement of surround effects is comparable to Dolby Digital 5.1.  
With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will automatically show the type of decoding being  
employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
2PRO LOGIC*  
This mode gives 4.1 channel surround sound. It is less sensitive to the quality of the source material, so  
may be useful when 2 PRO LOGIC II MOVIE or 2 PRO LOGIC II MUSIC modes do not give good  
results. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will automatically show the type of decoding  
being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
NEO:6 CINEMA*  
This mode gives 6.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for movies. The NEO:6 Cinema mode delivers  
good channel separation for movie soundtracks. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will  
automatically show the type of decoding being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
ACTION  
This mode is designed for action movies, which generally use lots of sound effects. The mode enriches the  
sound to make it more realistic and extends the parameters to pick up high and low sound effects.  
SCI-FI  
This mode is designed for science fiction movies. It creates a broad sound space, separating dialog from  
sound effects to heighten the overall impact of the soundtrack.  
DRAMA  
This mode is designed for movies with a lot of dialog. The elements of dialog are enhanced, making the  
characters seem more real. The mode also compresses the dynamic range somewhat so loud sounds do  
not overpower softer ones (compare this with the MIDNIGHT listening mode explained on page 50).  
MUSICAL  
This mode is primarily for music and adds a spacious feeling to the sound. A long delay time of reflected  
sounds provides resonant tones which emulate a concert hall.  
MONOFILM  
This mode is designed for older movies which are recorded with mono soundtracks. The special sound  
processing of this mode will allow you to experience these movies in surround sound even though they  
were not recorded that way originally.  
5/7-D THEATER  
This mode is especially designed to give sound depth to stereo sources. The overall effect builds a  
dynamic and broad sound space, allowing two-channel (stereo) signals to faithfully imitate a five speaker  
sound. The mode should be used in conjunction with Dolby Pro Logic for sources bearing the  
DOLBY SURROUND  
mark. The display will show either 5-D THEATER or 7-D THEATER according to the source,  
SB CH MODE and speaker configuration.  
When you input a multichannel signal the decoding is done automatically so you cannot choose  
these modes.  
*
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MUSIC modes (SURROUND mode)  
The MUSIC modes allow you to transform your living room into a variety of different sonic environments when  
playing either two-channel or multichannel sources. It optimizes its effects in accordance with your source, SB  
CH MODE and speaker configuration. The first two modes (2PRO LOGIC II MUSIC, NEO:6 MUSIC) for pure  
decoding of multichannel sound sources (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS). With these modes the receiver will  
automatically employ the format of the sound source (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS) and display it on  
receiver. With two channel sources these first two modes will create surround channels. Then there are five  
PIONEER original sound modes that use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to create different types of sound  
environments as described below. Lastly, the 5/7-CH STEREO mode simply outputs a stereo signal through all  
of your speakers.  
2PL II MUSIC (2PRO LOGIC II MUSIC)*  
This mode gives 5.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for music. Compared to the Movie Mode PRO  
LOGIC, the surround effect is more enveloping. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will  
automatically show the type of decoding being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
NEO:6 MUSIC*  
This mode gives 6.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for music. The NEO:6 Music mode plays the  
stereo source as is through the front left/right speakers, and generates a natural, ambient surround and  
center sound. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will automatically show the type of  
decoding being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
CLASSICAL  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a large concert hall. Suitable for classical music. A long delay time of  
reflected sounds, coupled with reverb effects, let the listener experience the dynamic and rich sounds  
characteristic of concert halls and powerful orchestral performances.  
CHAMBER  
Simulates the acoustic environment of a very resonant concert hall. Rich reverberation and a full sound  
create the impression of a lively performance space.  
JAZZ  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a jazz club. Reflected sound is virtually below 100 msec so that the  
listener can experience a live band effect.  
ROCK  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a mid-sized concert hall. The listener can experience a live band effect  
with good separation of the instruments, a strong bass and the vivid feeling of a live performance.  
DANCE  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a dance club. Features a strong bass sound.  
Reflected sound delay time is virtually below 50 msec, for the listener to experience the visceral power of  
dance music.  
5/7-CH STEREO  
Simulates the acoustic environment of a regular stereo while using all the speakers in the system to induce  
a rich, all-around sound. The display will change to 5-CH STEREO or 7-CH STEREO according to the SB CH  
MODE and speaker configuration.  
When you input a multichannel signal the decoding is done automatically so you cannot choose  
these modes.  
*
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting the Effect of a Listening Mode  
The DSP (Digital Signal Processing) listening modes have sound processing added to accentuate a certain kind  
of atmosphere or effect (see the preceding pages for explanation). You can choose if you want to strengthen or  
weaken this effect in the given mode. The DSP MOVIE modes are: ACTION, SCI-FI, DRAMA, MUSICAL,  
MONOFILM, 5/7-D THEATER. The DSP MUSIC modes are: CLASSICAL, CHAMBER, JAZZ, ROCK, DANCE.  
The following instructions show you how to adjust the amount of effect.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the EFFECT/CH SEL button  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
repeatedly until you see EFFECT in  
the receiver’s display.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
2
3
3 Use the +/– buttons to add or  
subtract the amount of effect.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
• The amount of effect can be adjusted ranging  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
memo  
ENTER  
from 10 to 90 (the default setting value is 50) by  
pressing +/–.  
EXIT  
RETURN  
Adding/Adjusting the Effect in Dolby Pro Logic II MUSIC Mode  
The Dolby Pro Logic II MUSIC mode has three settings you can choose from which adjust the spatial feeling of  
the surround sound. These settings are best matched to each individual source instead of on setting being left  
on for all sources. The three settings and how to apply them are explained here. To start this setup select Dolby  
Pro Logic ll (if necessary) with the MUSIC button.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the EFFECT/CH SEL button  
repeatedly and select the setting  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
you want. They appear in the  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
receiver’s display.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CENTER WIDTH : With Pro Logic decoding center  
channel signals can come only from the center  
speaker. If no center speaker is present this channel is  
split between the two front speakers, creating a  
"phantom" channel. The CENTER WIDTH feature lets  
you adjust the center channel so it can heard only from  
the center speaker, only as a "phantom" channel or in  
varying degrees of both.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
2
3
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
DIMENSION: This allows you to adjust the soundfield  
towards the front or towards the rear of your room.  
PANORAMA: This gives the music a wraparound  
surround feel.  
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
3 Use the +/– buttons to add or  
subtract the amount of effect or turn  
on/off.  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
CENTER WIDTH : Strengthen or weaken the effect  
between 0–7. The default is 3.  
Î
DIMENSION: Move soundfield backward or forward  
with -3 being the furthest back and +3 being the  
furthest forward. The default is 0.  
PANORAMA: Turn on or off. The default is off.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening with ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ  
You can listen to the soundtrack with the ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ you set automatically when you did the  
AUTO SURROUND SETUP (see page 13) or you set manually on page 99–101. To do so follow the instructions  
below.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
1 Press the ACOUSTIC EQ button.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
Each press switches ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ  
between ALL CH ADJUST, FRONT ALIGN, CUSTOM 1,  
CUSTOM 2 and OFF. When ACOUSTIC EQ is being  
applied the MCACC indicator lights.  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
1
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
ENTER  
Î
ALL CH ADJUST  
OFF CUSTOM 2  
FRONT ALIGN  
CUSTOM 1  
1
MCACC indicator  
memo  
• After completing the AUTO SURROUND SETUP  
(page 13) ACOUSTIC EQ ON (ALL CH ADJUST)  
is set automatically.  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-D2011  
• You can’t turn on ACOUSTIC EQ on in MULTI CH  
IN mode.  
• If you turn ACOUSTIC EQ on in DIRECT mode,  
the receiver automatically switches to STEREO  
mode.  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
STEREO/DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MASTER VOLUME  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SELECT  
Reducing Noise During Playback (DIGITAL NR Function)  
To reduce extraneous noise switch on DIGITAL NR. This feature is effective with sources containing a lot of  
background noise like cassette and video tape  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the DNR button on the remote  
control.  
Each press switches DIGITAL NR on or off.  
When on, DNR lights in the display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
memo  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
• In cases described below, noise may not be reduced even  
if DIGITAL NR is on.  
· Sudden noise  
· Extremely loud noise  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
2
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
· Signals that contain too many high frequencies  
Signals which are very clean to begin with.  
• DIGITAL NR is effective at levels shown below for each  
source.  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
STEREO  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
· Analog input ..................................................... 10-18 dB  
· Digital input ...................................................... 10-15 dB  
· AM/FM tuner ................................................... 10-15 dB  
MOVIE/MUSIC ......................................................6-10 dB  
• Depending on the condition of the source, there may not  
be a noticeable improvement in the quality of the sound.  
• You can’t use the DIGITAL NR mode with the THX  
CINEMA or MULTI CH IN modes, or a 96 kHz signal.  
• If you set the DIGITAL NR on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
Î
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode  
This useful feature makes it possible to get excellent surround sound effects even when listening at low  
volumes. It can be used with any surround sound source and play soundtracks so that the quieter sounds are  
audible even while playing a soundtrack at low volumes. This feature is applicable only when the master volume  
is under –20 dB.  
U
G
U
G
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
1 Press the MIDNIGHT button on the  
remote control.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
Each press switches MIDNIGHT mode on or off.  
When on, MIDNIGHT lights in the display.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
1
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
memo • The surround effect adjusts itself automatically  
in accordance with the volume level.  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
Î
• You can’t use the MIDNIGHT mode with the THX  
CINEMA, MULTI CH IN modes.  
• If you set MIDNIGHT on when in DIRECT mode  
the receiver switches to STEREO mode.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
multi-voltage model only  
1
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode  
The LOUDNESS mode boosts the bass and treble in a signal. It is useful for listening to music at low volumes.  
This feature is applicable only when the master volume is under –20 dB.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the LOUDNESS button on the  
remote control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
Each press switches LOUDNESS mode on or off.  
When on, LOUDNESS lights in the display.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
• You can’t use the LOUDNESS mode with the THX  
CINEMA, MULTI CH IN modes.  
• If you set LOUDNESS on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
memo  
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
2
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
multi-voltage model only  
1
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (TONE CONTROL)  
You can adjust the low (bass) and high (treble) frequencies. The TONE button can also be used to bypass the  
tone circuitry.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the TONE button on the  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
remote control or the front panel to  
put the receiver in tone adjust mode.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
There are two tone modes TONE: ON and TONE:  
BYPASS. The first means the tone functions are active  
and also lets you adjust these functions. The second  
means the tone controls are being bypassed, and thus  
have no effect on the sound.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
4
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
2
3
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
3 Press the BASS/TREBLE button  
repeatedly to select BASS or  
TREBLE.  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
If TONE: BYPASS appears, press the TONE button to  
get TONE: ON.  
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
4 Use the +/– buttons to adjust the low  
or high frequency levels.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
A few seconds after you finish adjusting the tone the  
receiver will revert to the sound mode it was in at the  
beginning of the process.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
memo  
2 3 4  
•
•
•
The TONE CONTROL can be adjusted in a range of  
dB.  
The TONE CONTROL cannot be set on in THX CIN-  
EMA, MULTI CH IN modes.  
If you set TONE CONTROL on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
6
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening in HI–BIT/SAMPLING mode  
Use to hear CD and DVD, as well as other digital soundtracks, at a wider dynamic range, allowing for finer audio  
reproduction.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the HI–BIT button on the  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
remote control or HI-BIT HI-  
SAMPLING button on the front  
panel.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
Each press switches HI-BIT/SAMPLING mode on or off.  
HI-BIT/SAMPLING lights in the display.  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
2
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
memo  
RETURN  
•
•
HI–BIT mode cannot be set on MULTI CH IN mode.  
If the receiver is in DIRECT mode and you press the  
HI–BIT button the receiver will switch to STEREO  
mode.  
This feature can’t be used with 96 kHz and 88.2 kHz  
sources.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
•
2
DVD-Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback  
MULTI CH IN allows you to connect a DVD-Audio player or an external decoder to enjoy certain multichannel  
discs. To use MULTI CH playback follow the instructions below.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
1 Press the MULTI CH INPUT button on  
the remote control or the MULTI CH  
IN button on the front panel.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
MODE  
Each press switches the input between the previous  
mode and MULTI CH IN.  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
ENTER  
ON: This is a true playback of the signal from the  
Î
MULTI CH INPUT terminals, output without digital  
processing. You can only control each channel level.  
OFF: Cancels the MULTI CH IN modes.  
1
• You can’t use any kind of sound processing with  
memo  
MULTI CH IN. Selecting a listening mode, or  
switching these modes, cancels the MULTI CH  
IN.  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-D2011  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
• If any speakers are set to NO the signal for that  
(those) channel(s) won’t get output at all.  
• You cannot set sound features (page 50-52) on, in  
MULTI CH IN mode.  
STEREO/DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MASTER VOLUME  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SELECT  
• You cannot listen to the SECOND ZONE in MULTI  
CH IN mode.  
• If you’re listening to DVD-Audio but can only get  
stereo sound set your DVD player’s 5.1 channel  
analog playback to on.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SB CH MODE button  
SB CH MODE  
The SB CH MODE makes available surround back channels through your surround back speakers. You must  
have chosen NORMAL SYSTEM in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setting (see page 37) and have SURROUND and  
SURROUND BACK speakers set to something other than NO (see pages 40–41) to use this feature. To  
accomplish the same settings, you could have had the AUTO SURROUND SETUP automatically set the  
SURROUND and the SURROUND BACK speakers on (see pages 13–15).  
ACOUSTIC  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
MUTE  
EQ  
1 Press the SB CH MODE button on the  
remote control.  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
1
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
ENTER  
Each press switches between ON, OFF and AUTO.  
Î
ON  
AUTO  
OFF  
For each choice you can create SURROUND BACK  
channels under the conditions listed below.  
ON: surround back channels are available with all SUR-  
ROUND modes;  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
AUTO: same as above except whether SURROUND BACK  
channels are available with any of the PRO LOGIC II (or  
PRO LOGIC) modes depends on whether the source has  
an EX or ES flag or not.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
With the NEO:6 modes surround back channels will  
always be available.  
OFF: SURROUND BACK channels will not be heard.  
1
• You can’t use the SB CH MODE with MULTI CH IN  
memo  
or STEREO/DIRECT modes.  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK Mode  
The VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode emulates surround back channels through your surround speakers. You  
must have chosen NORMAL SYSTEM in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setting (see page 37); have SURROUND  
speakers set to something other than NO, and have chosen NO for the SURROUND BACK speakers in  
SPEAKER SETTING (see page 40-41) to use this mode. To accomplish the same settings, you could have had  
the AUTO SURROUND SETUP automatically set the SURROUND speakers on and the SURROUND BACK  
speakers off (see pages 13-15) to use this mode.  
ACOUSTIC  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
MUTE  
EQ  
MODE  
1 Press the SB CH MODE button on the  
remote control.  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
1
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
ENTER  
Î
Each press switches between VIRTL SB ON, VIRTL SB  
OFF and VIRTL SB AUTO.  
VIRTL SB ON  
VIRTL SB AUTO  
VIRTL SB OFF  
For each choice you can create  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK channels under the condi-  
tions listed below.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
VIRTL SB ON: virtual surround back sound is available  
with all SURROUND modes except THX CINEMA; for a  
stereo signal you must choose the NEO:6 MOVIE/MUSIC  
SURROUND mode or a Pioneer original sound mode (see  
pages 47–48).  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIRTL SB AUTO: same as above except whether virtual  
surround back sound is available with any of the PRO  
LOGIC II (or PRO LOGIC) modes depends on whether the  
source has an EX or ES flag or not.  
With the NEO:6 modes virtual surround back sound will  
always be available.  
1
• You can’t use the VIRTUAL SUR-  
ROUND BACK mode with the THX  
CINEMA, MULTI CH IN,  
memo  
VIRTL SB OFF: virtual surround back sound will not be  
heard.  
54  
STEREO/DIRECT modes.  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
DUAL MONO setting and playback  
The dual mono setting can only be used when listening to Dolby Digital or homemade discs that have dual mono  
software encoded in them. Dual mono software usually is used to put two different mono soundtracks, that you  
have the capability of listening to at the same time, on one DVD. With this setting you can choose which dual  
mono setting you want to listen to. Remember this setting is only applicable if you are using Dolby Digital  
software with dual mono and want to isolate one of the channels therein.  
1 Press the RETURN button for more  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
than three seconds to put the  
receiver in DUAL MONO mode.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
Hold down the RETURN button to cycle through the  
different DUAL MONO settings. When you find the  
one you want release the button. The L (ch1) and R  
(ch2) indicators in the display light to indicate the  
playback channel.  
1
DUAL : ch1  
DUAL : ch2  
DUAL: ch1/ch2  
The different settings are: DUAL ch1, where you only  
hear channel 1; DUAL ch2, where you only hear channel  
2; and DUAL ch1/ch2, where you hear both channels,  
but independently from different speakers.  
• The default setting is DUAL ch1.  
memo  
• You can only use this function with Dolby Digital  
sources that have this function  
Using Headphones  
1 Plug headphones into the PHONES  
jack on the front of the receiver.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
No sound will be audible from the speakers when  
headphones are plugged in except in MULTI CH IN  
mode or when using the pre-outs. In MULTI CH IN  
mode the subwoofer will be audible even if the  
headphones are plugged in.  
1 PHONES jack  
• All SURROUND modes will be downmixed to 2  
channels.  
memo  
• If you’re listening to a 2 channel source there will  
be no matrix decoding (i.e. you will not be able to  
get surround sound decoding).  
• For MULTI CH IN mode, only the signal input from  
the MULTI CH IN FRONT L and R channels can  
be heard.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Video Select  
This function allows you to listen to one sound source while you watch a different video source on your TV. The  
sound source is set in the normal fashion as explained on page 44 You then change the video input with the  
VIDEO SEL button.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the VIDEO SEL button on the  
remote control to cycle through the  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
different possible video inputs.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
The first press shows the video input you are currently  
using. After that pressing VIDEO SELECT cycles though  
the possibilities in the following order:  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
VIDEO  
DVD/LD  
OFF  
TV/SAT  
VCR2  
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
2
VCR1/DVR  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
The OFF setting means you are listening without a  
video signal. (Also, when you select CD, CD-R/TAPE1,  
MD/TAPE2, TUNER, PHONO, USB or functions the  
VIDEO SELECT will be set to off.)  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
After choosing a video input the display on the receiver  
will show that input for about 5 seconds and then  
revert to showing the listening mode the receiver is in.  
• The VIDEO SELECT remains set to the input you  
chose until you change the audio input.  
• If you change audio functions the receiver will  
reset itself to make the video and audio inputs  
correspond.  
memo  
Also, if you switch the power of the receiver off  
when you turn it back on the video and audio in-  
puts will reset so that they correspond.  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display (DIMMER)  
Use the display DIMMER button to adjust the brightness of the fluorescent display.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Use the display DIMMER button on  
the remote control to alternate  
between the different levels of  
brightness for the display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
Four levels of brightness ranging from very dim to very  
bright can be selected. Each press changes the  
brightness of the display. When cycling through the  
options, the default brightness can also be selected.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
2
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
memo It is a feature of this unit that the fluorescent dis-  
play will be brighter for a few seconds after you  
choose a function (like DVD/LD, CD, etc.) and then  
get softer. This will still happen when you adjust  
the brightness but the new setting will be the one  
the display softens to.  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Automatic and Manual Tuning  
The following steps show you how to tune in FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the exact frequency of the station you want, see “Direct  
Access Tuning“ on the following page.  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
SETUP  
On the remote, this selects the tuner function on the  
receiver and sets the remote to the tuner operation  
mode.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
VCR1/  
MULTI-ROOM  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
MULTI CONTROL  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
LS  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
2 Press the BAND button to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
Each press switches the band: FM j AM  
RF ATT  
button  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
ENTER  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
EXIT  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
RETURN  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
OFF MUSIC  
MPX  
button  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
TUNING  
8
LS  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
3
2
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
3 Tune in the station.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
For Automatic Tuning  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
Press and hold TUNING –/+ for about one second, then  
release.  
The tuner starts searching the selected band and stop  
automatically at the first station it locates. Repeat to  
locate other stations.  
European model  
AUDIO/V  
For Manual Tuning  
STANDBY/ON  
• To change frequencies one step at a time, press  
TUNING –/+ repeatedly.  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
• To change frequencies quickly, hold down TUNING  
–/+ and release when you reach the frequency you  
desire.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
MPX Mode  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators do not light when  
tuning an FM station, because the station is too far away or  
the broadcast signal is weak, press MPX on the remote  
control to switch to MONO reception. This should improve  
reception enough for you to enjoy the broadcast.  
1
2 3  
multi-voltage model  
AUDIO/V  
STANDBY/ON  
RF ATT Mode (European model only)  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
If the radio signal is too strong and/or the sound is distorting  
press the RF ATT button to attenuate (lower) the radio  
signal input and reduce the distortion (for FM stations only).  
When on, RF ATT lights in the display.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
1
2 3  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Channel Step Setting (multi-voltage model only)  
The unit has been factory preset to the channel allocation value for the area in which it is to be sold. If this  
value is set incorrectly, the tunes in frequency may be wrong, or sound may be distorted, resulting in an  
inability to reproduce reception signals at their proper sound quality. For this reason, be sure to confirm  
that the values are set correctly before first using the unit.  
FM 50 kHz, AM 9 kHz:  
Set to this position, for areas with an FM reception step of 50 kHz and AM 9 kHz.  
FM 100 kHz, AM 10 kHz:  
Set to this position for areas with an FM reception step of 100 kHz and AM 10 kHz.  
When unsure about the channel allocation for your area, consult your dealer for correct  
information.  
memo  
To Change Channel Steps  
1 Turn the power off (standby mode).  
2 While holding down the TONE – button press the STANDBY/ON button.  
3 When you see STEP 9K/50K or STEP 10K/100K appear in the display. To change channel steps again  
repeat steps 1 and 2.  
Direct Access Tuning  
The following steps show you how to tune directly to a specific frequency using the remote control.  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
SETUP  
This selects the tuner function on the receiver and sets  
the remote to the tuner operation mode.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the BAND button to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
Each press switches the band : FM j AM  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
3
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
3 Press the DIRECT ACCESS button to  
activate the direct access tuning mode.  
The cursor blinks in the display on the front panel.  
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
4
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
ENTER  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
EXIT  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
RETURN  
ANALOG STEREO  
MULTI-ROOM  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
OFF MUSIC  
TUNING  
8
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
2
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
4 Use the number buttons to enter the  
frequency of the station you want.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
Example:  
To tune station 106.00 (FM), press: 1 = ` = 6 = ` =  
`
To cancel before inputting the frequency  
Press DIRECT ACCESS, and enter the frequency again.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Memorizing Frequently Used Stations  
The following steps show you how to memorize up to 30 radio stations in 3 classes (each holding 10 stations).  
When memorizing FM frequencies, the receiver also memorizes the MPX mode (STEREO or MONO) and the RF  
ATT mode (European model only).  
1 Tune in the station you want.  
SETUP  
See "Automatic and Manual Tuning" or "Direct Access  
Tuning" on page 57 and 58.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the TUNER EDIT button to  
activate the memory function.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
SIGNAL  
dB  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ANALOG STEREO  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
SP A B  
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
«
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
5
4
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
dB  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
ANALOG STEREO  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
SP A B  
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
3 Press the TEXT OFF CLASS button  
repeatedly to select a class number.  
Each press switches the display:  
3
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CLASS A  
CLASS B  
CLASS C  
European model  
AUDIO/  
4 Press the STATION –/+ buttons  
repeatedly (or use the MULTI JOG)  
to select a channel (0–9) within the  
respective class.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
MULTI-ROOM  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
5 Press the ENTER button to input  
your choice.  
(3-4) 5  
3 4 2  
multi-voltage model  
AUDIO/V  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
(3-4) 5  
3 4 2  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Naming Memorized Stations  
You can input a name of up to four characters for each preset station in the receiver’s memory (see the previous  
page). This name can be anything you choose. For example, you could input JAZZ for that station and when you  
listen to it the name, rather than the frequency number, will appear on your display.  
1 Press the TUNER button on the  
SETUP  
remote control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press TEXT OFF CLASS repeatedly  
to select the class.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
Repeatedly pressing this button cycles through the  
three available classes, A, B and C.  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
3 Press STATION + or STATION – to  
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
select the preset channel.  
6
5
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
4
2
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
4 Press TUNER EDIT to select the  
station name mode.  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
SIGNAL  
dB  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
ANALOG STEREO  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
3
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
SP A B  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
«
SIGNAL  
dB  
European model  
ANALOG STEREO  
AUDIO/V  
SP A B  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
5 Enter the station name you want.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
Names can be up to four characters long.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
•
On the front panel use the MULTI JOG dial or the +/–  
buttons. On the remote control use the STATION +/–  
buttons or the 2 3 buttons to select characters.  
Press ENTER to confirm a character. If no character  
is input, a space is input.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
•
To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1-4 and  
input four spaces instead of a name.  
1,5 5,6  
2 3,5 4  
The possible selections are shown below.  
multi-voltage model  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
AUDIO/V  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
!”#$%&’()*+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]ˆ_{|} [space]  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
6 Press ENTER when you have got the  
characters you want to enter.  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
Repeat steps 2 to 5 to memorize up to 30 preset  
broadcast station names.  
memo  
1,5 5,6  
2 3,5 4  
To change a station name, enter a new name over the  
top of the existing one.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Recalling Memorized Stations  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
SETUP  
This selects the TUNER function on the receiver and  
sets the remote to the TUNER operation mode.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
LS  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
2 Press the TEXT OFF CLASS button  
repeatedly to select a class number.  
Each press switches the display:  
1
2
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
3
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
CLASS A  
CLASS B  
CLASS C  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
3 Use the number buttons to select  
the channel you desire.  
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
To select channel 7, press 7.  
To select channel 0, press `.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
TV CH  
For example : If 99.50 MHz (FM) was memorized in  
class B at channel 7.  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
European model  
LS  
AUDIO/V  
To step through each channel in order  
STANDBY/ON  
Press the STATION –/+ buttons repeatedly.  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2 3  
multi-voltage model  
AUDIO/V  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2 3  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
An introduction to RDS (European model only)  
Radio Data System, or RDS as it’s usually known, is a system used by FM radio stations to provide listeners  
with various kinds of information—the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for  
example. This information shows up as text on the display, and you can switch between the kind of information  
shown. Although you don’t get RDS information from all FM radio stations, you do with most.  
Probably the best feature of RDS is that you can search automatically by type of program. So, if you felt like  
listening to jazz, you could search for a station that’s broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ. There  
are around 30 such program types, including various genres of music, news, sport, talk shows, financial  
information, and so on.  
The receiver lets you display three different kinds of RDS information: Radio Text, Program Service Name, and  
Program Type.  
Radio Text (RT) is messages sent by the radio station. These can be anything the broadcaster chooses—a talk  
radio station might give out it telephone number as RT, for example.  
Program Service Name (PS) is the name of the radio station.  
Program Type (PTY) indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast.  
The receiver can search for and display the following program types:  
NEWS  
AFFAIRS  
INFO  
News  
Current affairs  
General information  
Sports  
Educational material  
Radio drama  
Arts and culture  
Science and technology  
Usually talk-based material,  
such as quiz shows or  
interviews.  
Using the RDS display  
To display the different types of RDS information available,  
press TUNER button on the remote control and use the  
DISPMODE button to cycle through the types of RDS  
information.  
SPORT  
EDUCATE  
DRAMA  
CULTURE  
SCIENCE  
VARIED  
Each press changes the display as follows:  
R T  
P S  
PTY  
FREQ  
POP M  
Pop music  
ROCK M  
EASY M  
LIGHT M  
Rock music  
“Middle of the road” music  
‘Light’ classical music  
• If any noise is picked up while displaying  
the RT scroll, some characters may be  
displayed incorrectly.  
memo  
CLASSICS ‘Serious’ classical music  
OTHER M  
Other music not fitting any of  
the above categories  
• If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the  
RT display, it means no RT data is being  
transmitted from the broadcast station. If  
you have entered a name for the station,  
it is displayed instead of RT data. If you  
haven’t, the display will automatically  
switch to the PS data display. If no PS  
data is transmitted from the station, the  
frequency will be displayed.  
• In the PTY display, there are cases where  
NO DATA or NO TYPE is shown. If this  
happens, the PS display is shown after a  
few seconds.  
WEATHER Weather reports  
FINANCE Finance and business  
CHILDREN Children’s entertainment  
SOCIAL  
RELIGION  
Social affairs  
Religious programming  
PHONE IN Phone-in talk shows  
TRAVEL  
LEISURE  
JAZZ  
Travel  
Leisure interests and hobbies  
Jazz music  
COUNTRY Country music  
NATION M Popular music in a language  
other than English  
OLDIES  
FOLK M  
• This unit converts lower case characters  
transmitted by broadcast station to upper  
case characters.  
Popular music from the ’50s  
Folk music  
DOCUMENT Documentaries  
In addition, there is a program type called  
ALARM, used for exceptional emergency  
announcements. You can’t search for this, but  
the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS  
broadcast signal.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Searching for RDS programs (European model only)  
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to search for a particular kind of radio program. You can  
search for any of the program types (listed on page 62).  
AUDIO/V  
1 Tune into an FM station.  
STANDBY/ON  
Refer to “Automatic and Manual Tuning” or “Direct  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
Access Tuning” on p. 57 and 58.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
2 Use the BAND button to select the  
FM band.  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
RDS is only broadcast on FM.  
3 Press the SEARCH MODE button.  
SEARCH shows in the display.  
1,4 5-6  
2 4 3  
4 Press the +/–buttons or use the  
MULTI JOG dial to select the  
program type you want to hear.  
5 Press ENTER to search for the  
program type.  
The system starts searching through the station  
presets for a match. When it finds one, the search  
stops and the station plays for five seconds.  
6 If you want to keep listening to the  
station, press ENTER within the 5  
seconds.  
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.  
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find  
that program type at the time of the search.  
memo  
• RDS searches memorized stations only. If no  
stations have been (see page 59 to do this), NO  
PTY is displayed.  
• FINISH means the search is complete.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Basics of EON (Enhanced Other Network information)  
(European model only)  
When EON is turned on, the receiver jumps to an EON-linked broadcast when it begins, even if a receiver  
function other than the tuner is being used. It cannot be used in areas that EON information is not transmitted  
and when FM broadcast stations do not transmit PTY data. When the broadcast ends, the tuner returns to the  
original frequency or function.  
There are two types of EON you can set:  
1
TA (Traffic Announcement)  
This mode will set the tuner to pick up traffic information when it’s broadcast.  
2
NEWS  
This mode will set the tuner to pick up news when it is broadcast.  
memo  
EON does not work when the tuner is in the AM band.  
Using EON (European model only)  
Use the front panel controls to do this.  
AUDIO/V  
1 Press the BAND button to select the  
STANDBY/ON  
FM band.  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
EON is only broadcast on FM.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
2 Tune into an EON FM station.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
The ‡ indicator lights to inform you that the currently  
tuned station carries the EON data service. See pages  
57–58 for more on tuning into radio broadcasts.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
3 Press the EON MODE button to  
select the mode you want.  
1
3
These modes are explained above.  
Each press changes the display as follows:  
memo  
EON TA  
EON NEWS  
• The EON mode is canceled if you switch  
to AM reception while setting EON. It  
starts once again when you return to FM  
reception.  
• You can’t search for traffic  
announcements and news at the same  
time.  
OFF  
If EON information is being transmitted, the receiver  
jumps to the type of broadcast you selected. When the  
EON mode is set, the EON indicator lights, but during  
actual reception of an EON broadcast the EON  
indicator will flash.  
• You can’t operate the TUNER EDIT and  
CHARACTER SEARCH buttons while the  
EON indicator is lit.  
• If you want to change to a function other  
than the tuner, press the EON MODE  
button and turn the EON mode off.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Clearing all stations from the RDS or EON search  
(European model only)  
The receiver will automatically register an identifying marker (called a PI code) for any station you input into the  
memory classes which can receive RDS or EON data. If you want to remove the currently memorized stations  
from RDS and EON searches, you can do it by erasing the PI codes.  
AUDIO/  
1 Press and hold EON MODE (front  
STANDBY/ON  
panel) for about two seconds.  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
ERASE PI will be displayed.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
2 Press ENTER.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
ERASE PI flashes for two seconds to indicate the PI  
codes have been erased.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2
1
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other  
Components  
In addition to controlling the receiver, the supplied remote control can operate your other components (VCR, TV,  
DVD, CD, etc.) after you program it to do so. In this way, instead of fumbling with many different controls and  
buttons, you only need to use one remote control. If your component(s) are listed in the remote control's  
memory, simply follow the steps below. If your component(s) are not listed, or if you want the remote to learn  
additional operations, you can use the learning mode to input the information from the remote controls supplied  
with your other components.  
Recalling Settings Stored in the Remote Control  
The following steps show you how to recall the setting stored in the remote control. Once a setting is recalled  
and the component assigned, you can use this remote to easily operate the component.  
• To exit from the remote control setup mode at any time, press REMOTE SETUP.  
• See "Using Remote Control with Other Components" on pages 70 and 71 to operate your other  
components.  
memo  
• The display will disappear after one minute or so if no new commands are entered. Press any button  
to wake up the remote and continue the process.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
2 PRESET should be selected (if it isn't  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it) and  
press ENTER.  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SELECT FUNCTION blinks in the display.  
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
(for example, DVD/LD) you want to  
set.  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
2,  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
4-5  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
component you want to set up.  
Press ENTER.  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
MAKER appears in the remote control display.  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
name of the company that makes  
your component. (see pages 115-  
116)  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
The company names appear in the remote control  
display. If there is more than one component type for  
that company that makes your component then –1, –2,  
etc., will appear in the display. Choose one of the  
types and see if that works.  
memo  
The TUNER button cannot be assigned.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
6 Point the remote control at the  
component you want set and press  
ENTER.  
SETUP  
OK? will appear in the remote control display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
If the component you are trying to control turns on/off you  
have set it correctly. Use the 5∞ buttons to select YES and  
go on to step 7.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
If the component you are trying to control does not turn on/  
off the correct preset code has not been selected. In this  
case, use the 5∞ buttons to select NO, press ENTER and  
go back to step 5. Try another preset code for that maker. (If  
the component you are trying to setup doesn't have a  
standby/on mode it won't turn on even if the correct preset  
code is entered. In this case select YES and go on to step  
7.)  
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
6-9  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
If you can't seem to get the component you are trying to  
set to turn on or off you can still set up your remote control  
by using the LEARNING mode (on the next page).  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
7 Press ENTER. The preset code has been  
entered.  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
COMPLETE will appear in the display.  
Î
Naturally it's easiest and most logical to assign the button  
that has the same name as the component you are setting  
up (for example, choose the DVD/LD button for your DVD  
player).  
You may find you have components which do not corre-  
spond to the name on any MULTI CONTROL button (for  
example a cable TV tuner) or you have two components  
where only one button is provided (for example, CD-R/TAPE  
1). In this case, use step 3 to assign any available MULTI  
CONTROL button to the component you want to remote  
control.  
For example, you may have both a CD-R and a tape deck in  
your system but only one video deck. It would make sense  
to assign the CD-R/TAPE 1 MULTI CONTROL button to the  
CD-R and the VCR 2 MULTI CONTROL button to your tape  
deck. To do this choose VCR 2 in step 3 when you want to  
set up the tape deck. Then choose TAPE in step 4 and  
proceed as above. The only practical difference in this  
method is that you have to remember the VCR 2 MULTI  
CONTROL button is actually your tape deck.  
In this case, you would need to hook up your tape deck to  
the input jacks marked VCR 2 on the back of the receiver.  
This method should help you customize the remote control  
for your system and let you control all of your components  
with the remote control for the VSX-D2011.  
8 Repeat the process from step 2 for all of  
your components.  
9 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Programming Signals from Other Remote Controls (LEARNING Mode)  
If preset codes are not available for your component(s), or the available preset codes do not operate correctly,  
you can use this procedure to program in signals from the remote control(s) of your other component(s). These  
steps can also be used to add further operations to the remote control that were successfully set with the  
stored settings (see pages 66–67).  
• To exit from the remote control setup mode at any time, press REMOTE SETUP.  
• You can also program the 5˜∞˜2˜3 and ENTER buttons with the LEARNING mode.  
• The TUNER button cannot be assigned.  
memo  
• The display will disappear after one minute or so if no new commands are entered. Press any button  
to wake up the remote and continue the process.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
LEARNING and press ENTER.  
SELECT FUNCTION blinks on the remote control.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3
2
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
DISC  
ENTER  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component you want to  
control.  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
4
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
For example: DVD/LD  
Buttons that  
are able to  
learn new  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
SELECT KEY flashes in the display.  
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL+  
CHANNEL–  
commands  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
4 Choose the command you want to  
teach the remote control and press  
the corresponding button. The word  
LEARN will blink in the remote  
control display.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
For example, choose the 3 (play) button to program  
this remote control to play your DVD player.  
•
The TV POWER, TV FUNC, TV CH +/– and VOL +/–  
buttons are only available for learning when  
programming TV CONT button.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
5 While LEARN continues to flash,  
point the two remote controls  
toward each other. Press the button  
on the other remote control  
corresponding to the operation you  
want to program.  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
5-20 cm  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
After the process is complete and the command has  
been learned, OK will appear in the remote control  
display. If NG (no good) appears, it means that for  
some reason the command was not learned. In this  
case, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
CONTINUE? appears in the remote's display.  
If SELECT KEY is flashing go back to step 4.  
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
6-7,  
9,10  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
6 If you want to program in more  
commands use the 5∞ buttons to  
select YES. Press ENTER.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to teach the remote control of  
the VSX-D2011 all the commands from the other  
remote control.  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
Î
7 If you want to program in  
commands for another MULTI  
CONTROL button use the 5∞  
buttons to select NO. Press ENTER.  
Buttons that are able  
to learn new  
commands  
8 Repeat the process from step 2 for  
all of your components.  
Start again to program other components in this  
manner.  
• If FULL appears in step 5 it means  
that there isn't enough capacity to  
learn this command. If you want to  
clear other buttons to make room for  
this one follow the procedure on page  
87.  
memo  
9 When you're done use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT.  
You will return to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
10 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
• If there isn't enough capacity, an in-  
correct signal has been sent or, in  
some cases, the command from an-  
other remote control simply cannot  
be learned, NG (no good) will appear  
in the display in step 5.  
• In some NG cases the remotes just  
need to be moved closer together or  
farther apart.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Using Remote Control with Other Components  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD recorder/Cassette Deck operations  
• The following operations are available from the receiver's remote control after you program it  
(see “Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other Components,“ pages 66–69).  
• To perform these operations, press the MULTI CONTROL button for the component you want to  
control.  
memo  
• For more information on individual commands consult the manual that came with the component.  
Button(s)  
Function  
Components  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
SOURCE  
Press to switch the components between STANDBY and ON.  
Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Repeated presses  
skips to the start of previous tracks or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
4
¢
Go back channels (channel −).  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Cassette deck  
Play the reverse side of the tape on a reversible deck.  
Press to advance to the start of the next track or chapter. Repeated presses  
skips to the start of following tracks or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
Go forward channels (channel +).  
Pause playback or recording.  
VCR/DVD recorder  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
8
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
¡
1
3
Hold down for fast forward playback.  
Hold down for fast reverse playback.  
Start playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
Stop playback (on some models, pressing this when the disc is already  
stopped will cause the disc tray to open).  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
7
MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD recorder/  
Cassette deck  
Starts recording.  
SUBTITLE/  
DISP MODE  
Button  
Displays/changes the subtitles on multilingual DVDs.  
DVD/DVD recorder  
Change the display mode.  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/LD  
CD/MD/CD-R/LD  
Directly access tracks on a program source.  
Directly access chapter on a program source.  
Directly select a channel.  
Number  
Buttons  
DVD/DVD recorder  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Select tracks or chapter higher than 10. Press this button and the remaining  
number to get the track or chapter (+10 Button + 3= track or chapter 13).  
Some components may operate differently.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder  
+10 Button  
ENTER/DISC  
Button  
Press to start Search mode.  
DVD  
Takes you to the disc navigator.  
DVD recorder  
Changes between sides A & B of the disc.  
Press to enter the selected channel.  
Selects a disc in a multi-disc CD player.  
LD  
VCR  
CD  
MENU  
AUDIO  
Displays menus concerning the current DVD, DVR or VCR you are using.  
Changes the audio track of discs with more than one audio track.  
DVD/DVD recorder/VCR  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder  
Changes between the tuner in the TV and the tuner in the VCR.  
Play the reverse side of the tape on a reversible cassette deck.  
VCR  
Double cassette 2nd deck  
TOP MENU  
/GUIDE  
button  
Displays the top menu of the current DVD, LD or DVR you are using.  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder  
Takes you to the guide menu of that system.  
Press to select a track  
VCR  
CD  
RETURN/  
EXIT button  
Takes you to the previous menu.  
DVD/LD/VCR/DVD recorder  
2 3 5∞ &  
ENTER  
Navigate menus/options.  
Basic playback options.  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder/VCR  
Double cassette 2nd deck  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TVoperations  
• The following operations are available from the receiver's remote control after you program it  
(see “Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other Components,“ pages 66–69).  
• To perform these operations, press the MULTI CONTROL button for the component you want to  
control.  
memo  
• For more information on individual commands consult the manual that came with the component.  
Button(s)  
TV  
Function  
Components  
Press to switch the TV, Satellite TV or Cable TV between STANDBY and ON. Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
TV INPUT  
Press to switch the TV input.  
TV  
TV CH (+/−) Select channels.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
TV VOL  
Adjust the TV volume.  
TV  
(+/−)  
MENU  
GUIDE  
RETURN  
Takes you to the TV menu of that system.  
Takes you to the guide menu of that system.  
Exits the menu you are viewing.  
A/Cyan  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
Satellite TV/ TV  
Satellite TV/ TV  
Satellite TV/ TV  
Cable TV  
B/Press to switch the TEXT ON.  
C/RED  
8
1
Use to move back a page in the menu.  
D/GREEN  
Satellite TV/ TV  
Satellite TV/ TV  
Cable TV  
3
E/YELLOW  
¡
Use to move forward a page in the menu.  
Use to move back channels.  
TV/ Cable TV  
4
¢
7
Use to move back a page in the menu.  
Use to move forward channels.  
Satellite TV  
TV/ Cable TV  
Satellite TV  
TV  
Use to move forward a page in the menu.  
Press to switch the TEXT OFF.  
Number  
Buttons  
Use to select a specific TV channel.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
Cable TV/ TV  
ENTER/DISC  
button  
Use this button to immediately enter a new channel.  
Press to select or adjust and navigate items on the menu screen.  
2 3 5∞ &  
ENTER  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
• The first four buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CONT button. Thus if you  
only have one TV hooked up to this system, assign it to the TV CONT button. If you have two TVs,  
assign the main TV to the TV CONT button. If you hook up your system this way, the first four TV  
controls will always be accessible.  
memo  
For example, if you connect your TV to TV monitor, then use TV CONT for your TV. If you connect your  
TV to input source then use TV.  
• Depending on the maker and individual model, there are some buttons that may not be able operate  
some equipment or may operate it in a different way.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION  
The direct function will not be necessary for most users. It is designed in case you have an external video  
source connected to your TV (a video source that is not going through the VSX-D2011). For this explanation we'll  
call this the external video deck. You'd like to control external video deck with this unit's remote control so  
you've assigned it a function button (for example purposes, the VCR 2 button). Yet, if you put the receiver in  
VCR 2 mode you'll get no picture on your TV because the external video deck signal is not going through the  
VSX-D2011. To get around this problem you set the DIRECT FUNCTION for VCR 2 to OFF. Now when you press  
VCR 2 function button you can control the external video deck with the remote but the receiver does not go into  
VCR 2 mode.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3
DIRCTFNC and press ENTER.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
SELECT FUNCTION will flash in the remote control  
display.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button of  
the component whose direct  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
2,4  
RETURN  
function you want to turn on or off.  
DIRECTFUNC appears on the remote control display.  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select ON,  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
OFF, or EXIT and press ENTER.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
ON: The direct function is on.  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
OFF: The direct function is off.  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
EXIT: Leaves the DIRECT FUNCTION settings and  
returns you to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
After you press ENTER, if you chose one of the first  
two settings, COMPLETE will appear in the display.  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1,6  
Î
5 Repeat steps 2–4 to set the direct  
function for as many components as  
you want.  
6 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
return to the previous mode.  
• To exit from the remote control  
setup mode at any time, press  
REMOTE SETUP.  
memo  
• The default setting for all DIRECT  
FUNCTIONs is ON.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Recording from Audio/Video Components  
The following explanations show you how make a recording from one component to another connected to this receiver.  
Note that an analog recorder (such as a VCR) cannot record from a source that is connected using only a digital  
connection. Likewise, a digital recorder (such as a CD-R) cannot record digitally from a component that is connected using  
only analog connections. In both of these cases, make sure that the digital component also has analog connections to the  
receiver, and that the SIGNAL SELECT is set to ANALOG.  
When recording from one digital component to another, bear in mind that the digital signal output from this receiver  
mirrors the input from the source. So if the input is, say, Dolby Digital, the output will also be Dolby Digital. Before  
recording, make sure that the recorder is compatible with the source digital audio format.  
See page 20 for more on analog audio connections and pages 22–23 for digital audio connections.  
• The receiver's volume, channel level, balance, TONE, DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS,  
memo  
ACOUSTIC EQ and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal, except in PHONO. Thus  
when recording in PHONO function DIRECT is best used.  
• In some cases, digital recordings have copy guard protections and making a digital copy is not pos-  
sible. In this case you can only copy them in an analog manner.  
• Some video recordings are copy-protected; these sources cannot be recorded.  
• When recording video, the source must be connected to the receiver using the same type of video  
cord (composite, or S video) as you used to connect the recorder to the receiver.  
Functions that can be recorded  
1 Select the source component. Set  
SIGNAL SELECT according to the  
source component's signal (ANALOG  
or DIGITAL).  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Start recording (tape deck, CD  
recorder, VCR, etc.)  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
3 Playback the source to be recorded.  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
1
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
SECOND ZONE (Speaker System B)/FRONT BI-AMP Setup  
Stereo playback in another room (SECOND ZONE)  
This setup enables you to listen to a pair of stereo speakers independently of the main speaker system  
hooked up to the receiver. You can choose SECOND ZONE, and use the speakers hooked up to the  
surround back terminals as a B speaker system, that is, playing the same source as the main speaker  
system but from independent stereo speakers.  
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.  
2 Select SECOND ZONE in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup (see page 37)  
setup.  
memo  
Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 8 Ω-16 Ω.  
Bi-amping the front speakers (FRONT BI-AMP)  
For bi-amp playback you can connect both the A and B speaker terminals to your front speakers. To do this  
your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies).  
Bi-amping delivers more power to the front speakers, but disables the surround back speakers, so you will  
be limited to 5.1 channel playback.  
Caution!  
FRONT Speaker  
rear side  
Most speakers with both  
HI and LOW terminals  
have two metal plates  
that connect the HI to  
the LOW terminals.  
These must be removed  
when you are bi-amping  
the speakers or you  
could severely damage  
the amplifier. See your  
speaker manual for more  
information.  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND BACK /  
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
Å
R
L
R
L
R
L
·
ª
ª
ª
Hi  
·
·
·
ª
Lo  
Caution!  
Do not allow any speaker wire from any  
terminal to touch a wire from a different  
terminal.  
1 Connect your speakers as shown.  
Since both Front A and B speaker terminals output  
the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (A or  
B) is powering which part (HI or LOW) of the  
speaker.  
2 Select FRONT BI-AMP in the  
SURRBACK SYSTEM setup (see  
page 37).  
The surround back channel amplifier is now used  
to power the B set of speaker terminals and the  
A+B (SP3AB) speaker setting is automatically  
selected. The speaker setting in this case can only  
be A+B or OFF.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
A/B Speaker Button  
If you selected NORMAL SYSTEM in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup (see page 37) your surround back  
speakers will be used was part of your of main speaker systems and this button will simply switch if off or on.  
If you selected SECOND ZONE in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup (see page 37) this button will cycle through  
the A (main) speaker system, the B speaker system (the surround back speakers acting as a separate second  
zone), both speaker systems, and off.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
1 Press the SPEAKERS button (on the  
front panel) to switch speakers on/  
off or cycle through the different  
speaker systems if SECOND ZONE  
or FRONT BI-AMP has been selected  
in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup.  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
1
A(SP3A):  
Sound is output from speaker system A and the same signal is output from the pre out  
terminals.  
B(SP3B):  
Sound is output from the two speakers in speaker system B (the surround back speakers).  
Multichannel sources will be downmixed to these two speakers.  
A&B(SP3AB): Sound is output from speaker system A speakers and the B speakers. Also, for FRONT BI-  
AMP playback.  
OFF(SP3 ): No sound is output from the speakers. Depending on the input signal and settings in  
SPEAKER SETTING sound may be output from the subwoofer. The same sound is output  
from the pre out terminals as when selecting speaker system A (above).  
• What is output from the subwoofer depends on the SPEAKER SETTING and the type of source.  
• Depending on the settings in SPEAKER SETTING and the MULTI CH IN SELECT, output from the  
SURROUND BACK PRE OUT terminals may change.  
• When using headphones the speakers are switched off.  
• Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 8 Ω-16 Ω.  
memo  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Setting up and Using the USB Audio Connection  
The USB Audio Connection feature allows you hook up a PC to this receiver. In this way you can hear  
soundtracks from your computer. To use this feature follow the steps below. A few points to remember  
when hooking up this receiver to a computer: the USB drive is bus powered, which means a power current  
is inherent in the connection. Thus you don't need to have the receiver on when doing the setup below (you  
can if you want). The USB port can only receive 2 channel soundtracks. USB device controls on the com-  
puter (such as volume) may or may not work. In either case, we recommend leaving all volume controls on  
R
max and controlling the volume from the receiver. For explanation purposes we will use Windows XP  
R
R
R
operating system (OS) but the USB drive can also be use with Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows  
R
98 SE, and Windows 98. The specific setups of those operating systems will be slightly different than that  
of XP.  
1 Connect your PC to the USB  
1
terminal.  
FRONT  
R
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
LD)  
L
L
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
You need to use a full speed USB cable (not sup-  
plied) for this connection.  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
R
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
B type  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
USB  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
2 Turn on your PC and start up your  
OS.  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMP  
Some operating systems may or may not work with  
this USB port.  
If the computer was previously running quit all  
applications.  
A type  
3 Install the USB drivers by following  
the instructions on your PC monitor.  
PC  
Your PC should automatically recognize the new USB  
connection and a dialog box concerning USB devices  
should open on your computer. For some operating  
systems you may need to load the system CD-ROM  
and install the USB driver.  
USB cable  
R
(This illustration is for Windows XP OS.)  
4
Follow the directions in the dialog box to install the  
USB driver.  
R
For Windows XP the USB driver will install automati-  
cally and no dialog box will appear.  
For all operating systems do step 4 to make sure  
installation was done properly.  
4 Check to see if the drivers are  
correctly installed.  
If the installation was successful "USB Audio Device"  
will appear in three computer menus, 1) in Sound,  
Video & Game Controllers, 2) in Universal Serial Bus  
Controllers and 3) in USB Compatible Device. To find  
these menus follow the path below (assuming none  
of these standard OS menus have been moved or  
deleted).  
R
• For Windows XP check by opening:  
Start\ Settings\ Control Panel\ Performance &  
Maintenance\ System\ Hardware\ Device  
Manager\ Sound, Video & Game Controllers\ USB  
Audio Device  
For other OS the path will be slightly different but  
nearly the same.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
5 Change the PC audio setting (if  
necessary).  
SETUP  
You may need to change the audio setting on  
your computer to hear a soundtrack through the  
USB port. If so, follow the path below.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
6
7
R
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
• For Windows XP:  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
Start\ Settings\ Control Panel. Click on  
Multimedia Properties, select USB Audio Device  
[1] for Playback of Audio. Close window.  
For other OS the path will be slightly different but  
nearly the same.  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
6 Switch on the receiver.  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
7 Use the INPUT button on the  
remote control or the MULTI  
JOG dial on the front panel to  
select the USB input.  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
8 Play back a music file on your PC.  
The volume on both the computer and the  
receiver is turned up.  
6
7
memo  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while installing the driv-  
ers. Also, do not turn off the receiver or disconnect the  
USB cable while the your PC is recognizing the receiver,  
which takes a few seconds every time you turn on your  
PC and it is hooked up the receiver.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
• If your PC does not recognize the receiver try  
disconnecting the USB cable and connecting it again. If  
it still does not recognize it restart the computer.  
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while playing a  
soundtrack from the computer.  
• The sound may be interrupted, degraded or played back  
incorrectly due to your PC settings and PC specifications.  
Consult your PC manual concerning USB devices.  
R
• Windows 95 and other older operating systems will not  
work.  
• Don't use USB hub connectors.  
• Some software may be incompatible with this  
configuration.  
• This configuration cannot be upgraded.  
• The maximum power for the USB connection is 100 mA.  
• Pioneer cannot be held responsible for damage to your  
computer system, software crashes or failures or any  
other possible computer problems due to this configura-  
tion.  
• This USB connection only supports 2 channel sound.  
• When listening to your PC through this USB connection  
you will also hear computer alert sounds through the  
receiver.  
• You cannot control your PC with any controls on the re-  
ceiver. The connection is only from the PC to the receiver.  
• When you're using the USB connection no signal will be  
output from the DIGITAL OUT 1 & 2.  
R
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows  
2000, Windows Me and Windows XP  
are registered trademarks of the  
Microsoft Corporation.  
R
R
R
• Don't use otther applications on your computer when  
playing back through this USB connection.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Connecting Additional Amplifiers  
This receiver has more than sufficient power for any home use, but it is possible to add additional amplifiers to  
every channel of your system. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
Powered subwoofer  
PRE OUT  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
PCM/  
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS/MPEG  
SUB  
WOOFER  
L
R
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
Front channel  
amplifier  
CONTROL  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
2
1
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
R
L
L
1
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(TV/  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
R
L
2
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
(CD-R/  
R
ROUND  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
BACK  
Surround channel  
amplifier  
R
FRONT  
L
L
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
LD)  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
R
L
R
Surround back  
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
channel amplifier  
ASSIGNABLE  
USB  
PHONO/  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
ANALOG  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channels for a single speaker as well. In this  
case plug the amplifier into the L (SINGLE) terminal only.  
memo  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have set up the SURRBACK  
SYSTEM (see page 37).  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
The PIONEER SR System: Operating other PIONEER  
components  
Connecting an optional control cord allows you to operate other PIONEER components simply by pointing the  
receiver's remote control at the remote sensor on the front panel of the receiver. The receiver then sends the  
remote control signals to the other devices via the CONTROL OUT terminal.  
IN  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
Receiver  
PIONEER component  
with an CONTROL  
terminals.  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
L
O
U
D
N
E
S
S
S
P
E
A
K
E
R
A
/
B
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
–
8
To CONTROL IN  
terminal of another  
PIONEER component  
with an CONTROL  
terminals.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
9
0
ENTER  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
EXTRA MENU  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
T
V
I
N
P
U
T
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
Remote Control  
• You can also control PIONEER components (and those made by other manufacturers) by pointing the  
receiver's remote control directly at the respective component. This type of operation does not re-  
quire control cords. All you have to do is recall the appropriate stored settings (see pages 66–67).  
• If you use a remote control hooked up via the CONTROL IN jack with a control cord, you won't be able  
to use this unit's remote control.  
memo  
• If you use this feature make sure an analog (audio and/or video) connection has been made between  
the units.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Multi Operations  
Multi operations allow you to tell the receiver and your other components to do a number of things with the  
push of only two buttons on the remote control (see "Performing Multi Operations" on the next page). For  
example, you can program the unit to turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded  
DVD. This allows you to freely decide which operations you want performed as well as the order in which you  
want them performed. The steps below show you how to program a string of up to 5 different operations for  
each MULTI CONTROL button. You don't need to program the power of this receiver (or any PIONEER  
component used) to go on, it (or they) will do so automatically when multi operations are performed.  
Be sure to set up each component before programming multi operations (see “Setting Up the  
Remote Control to Control Other Components“, pages 66-69).  
memo  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
more than three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select MULTI  
OPE and press ENTER.  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3,6  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
SELECT FUNCTION blinks on the remote display.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component you want to start  
the Multi Operations with. MULTI  
OPE appears in the display.  
For example, DVD/LD  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
7
2,4,5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
Buttons that  
can be  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
programmed  
with Multi  
Operations  
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select first  
command. "1st Cmmnd" appears in  
the display. Press ENTER.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
This tells the receiver this will be the first command.  
To erase a command  
Select CLEAR and press ENTER. Then go to step 8.  
To go back one step  
Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
5 To setup a command select CHANGE  
and press ENTER.  
FUNCTION flashes in the display,  
6 Select the component whose  
command you want to input (for  
example, a DVD player), and press  
the MULTI CONTROL button for it.  
KEY will flash in the display.  
memo  
• To exit from the REMOTE SETUP mode at  
anytime press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
• The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press any  
button to wake up the remote and continue the  
process.  
7 Select a button for the command you  
want to input (for example, 3 [play]).  
COMPLETE appears in the display.  
8 Repeat steps 4-7 to program a  
sequence of up to five commands.  
You can assign Multi Operations for up to 5 commands  
for each MULTI CONTROL button.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
9 When done select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
SETUP  
You will return to the REMOTE SETUP menu. Start  
again from step 2 if you want to set do another MULTI  
CONTROL button.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
10 Select EXIT and press ENTER again.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
You will exit the REMOTE SETUP menu and return to  
normal operation.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
You don't need to program power on for  
memo  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
PIONEER components (except for the first  
generation of Pioneer DVRs), they will go on  
automatically if a command for that unit is  
entered in the Multi Operations settings. Also,  
your TV will go on automatically if a TV related  
command is entered in the Multi Operations.  
EXIT  
9–10  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
Î
Performing Multi Operations  
Do the following to use the Multi Operations.  
1 Press the MULTI OPERATION  
button.  
SETUP  
SELECT FUNCTION flashes in the display,  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component that has been set  
up with multi operations.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
2
1
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
The power of the receiver (and any Pioneer compo-  
nents use in the program) goes on and the pro-  
grammed multi operations are performed automati-  
cally.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
7
8
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
SYSTEM OFF  
The SYSTEM OFF feature allows you to tell the receiver and your other components to stop and/or turn off with  
the push of only one button on the remote control. For example, you can program the unit to stop your DVD,  
turn off your TV and turn off your DVD player. You don't need to program power off for PIONEER components,  
they will go off automatically in this mode. The receiver itself will go off automatically as well.  
The steps below show you how to program a string of up to 5 different SYSTEM OFF operations.  
Be sure to set up each component before programming the SYSTEM OFF function (see “Setting  
Up the Remote Control to Control Other Components“, pages 66-69).  
memo  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
more than three seconds.  
SETUP  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select SYS  
OFF and press ENTER.  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
5
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
SYSTEM OFF appears in the remote display.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select first  
command. "1st Cmmnd" appears in  
the display. Press ENTER.  
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
6
2-4  
8-9  
RETURN  
This tells the receiver this will be the first command.  
To erase a command  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
Buttons that  
can be  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
Select CLEAR and press ENTER. Then go to step 7.  
To go back one step  
Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
programmed  
with do  
SYSTEM  
OFF Opera-  
tions  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
4 To setup a command select CHANGE  
and press ENTER.  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
FUNCTION flashes in the display,  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
5 Select the component whose  
command you want to input (for  
example, a DVD player), and press  
the MULTI CONTROL button for it.  
KEY will flash in the display.  
6 Select a button for the command you  
want to input (for example, 7 [stop]).  
COMPLETE appears in the display.  
memo  
7 Repeat steps 3-6 to program a  
sequence of up to five commands.  
• To exit from the REMOTE SETUP mode at  
anytime press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
• The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press any  
button to wake up the remote and continue the  
process.  
You can assign SYSTEM OFF information for up to 5  
commands.  
8 When done select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
You will return to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
9 Select EXIT and press ENTER again.  
You will exit the REMOTE SETUP menu and return to  
normal operation.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Using SYSTEM OFF  
Do the following to use the SYSTEM OFF function.  
1 Press the SYSTEM OFF button.  
SETUP  
The remote control must be on to be able to use this  
command but it can be in any mode.  
All the components programmed into the SYSTEM  
OFF mode will stop and/or go off. The receiver and  
Pioneer components will go off as well.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
1
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Editing Remote Control Display Names  
Use this capability to rename the display on the remote control for different MULTI CONTROL buttons (DVD/LD,  
etc.). For example, you could change TV to DVD2. In this way you can personalize your system. This is similar to  
the feature on page 93 but that feature changes the display on the receiver.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP for more  
SETUP  
than three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
FUNCNAME and press ENTER.  
SELECT FUNCTION will flash in the display.  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
DISC  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component you want to  
rename.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
2,4-7  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
For example, TV  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
letters and/or numbers you want to  
enter and use the 2 3 buttons to  
move the cursor to the next  
position.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
Here are the possible letters/numbers.  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!#%&'()*+–./:;<=>?  
@[\]\^_`{|}~327¶ 8 ≠=+•(space)  
You can input up to eight letter/numbers.  
memo  
5 When you're finished press ENTER,  
END will blink, press ENTER again.  
The COMPLETE appears in the display.  
• To exit from the remote setup mode at any-  
time press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
• The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press  
any button to wake up the remote and con-  
tinue the process.  
6 Go back to step 2 to input as many  
function names as you want.  
7 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
You will exit the REMOTE SETUP menu and return to  
normal operation.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Editing Button Names (KEY LABEL)  
Use the KEY LABEL capability to rename the display on the remote control for different buttons (keys). You  
would want to do this if you taught a specific button a new operation.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP for more  
SETUP  
than three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select KEY  
LABEL and press ENTER.  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
SELECT FUNCTION will flash in the display.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component whose button  
you want to rename.  
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
2,5-8  
RETURN  
For example DVD/LD  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
SELECT KEY flashes in the display.  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
¢
4 Press the buttons whose name you  
want to change.  
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
For example, 3  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
The name-changing screen appears in the display.  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
letters and/or numbers you want to  
enter and use the 2 3 buttons to  
move the cursor to the next  
position.  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
Here are the possible letters/numbers.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!#%&'()*+–./:;<=>?  
@[\]\^_`{|}~327¶ 8 ≠=+•(space)  
You can input up to eight letter/numbers.  
memo  
6 When you're finished press ENTER,  
END will blink, press ENTER again.  
COMPLETE appears in the display.  
• To exit from the remote setup mode  
at anytime press the REMOTE SETUP  
button.  
• The display will disappear after one  
minute or so if no new commands are  
entered. Press any button to wake up  
the remote and continue the process.  
7 Go back to step 2 to input as many  
button names as you want.  
8 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
You will exit the REMOTE SETUP menu and return to  
normal operation.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Adjusting the Light on the Remote Control  
This feature allows you to adjust the brightness of the light on the remote control.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
LIGHT and press ENTER.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select HIGH,  
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
LOW, or EXIT and press ENTER.  
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
HIGH: The brightest setting  
LOW : A dimmer setting  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
2-4  
RETURN  
OFF : Turns the remote control light off.  
EXIT : Leaves the LIGHT setting and returns you to  
the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
After pressing ENTER in the first three cases, COM-  
PLETE will appear in the display and you will be  
returned to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
4 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
You will exit the REMOTE SETUP menu and return to  
normal operation.  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
memo  
• To exit from the remote setup mode at any time press  
the REMOTE SETUP button.  
• The display will disappear after one minute or so if no new  
commands are entered. Press any button to wake up the  
remote and continue the process.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Clearing Remote Control Settings You Have Input  
This feature allows you to clear a particular setting, or all of the settings from a function in the REMOTE SETUP  
menu.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button  
SETUP  
for three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
CLEAR and press ENTER.  
CLEAR appears in the display.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
4
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
DISC  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select one  
setting, or all of the settings, and  
press ENTER.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
2,3  
6-7  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
The choices in this feature include:  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
LEARNING CLEAR: allows you to clear one command  
you have set in the LEARNING function. After  
pressing ENTER SELECT FUNCTION flashes in the  
display. Go to step 4.  
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL+  
CHANNEL–  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
KEYLABEL CLEAR: allows you to clear one button  
name you have set in the KEYLABEL function. After  
pressing ENTER SELECT FUNCTION flashes in the  
display. Go to step 4.  
TV CH  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MODE  
SURROUND  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
ALL CLEAR: Allows you to clear all the REMOTE  
SETUP settings. After pressing ENTER, CLEAR?  
appears in the display. Go to step 6.  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
Î
EXIT: Returns you to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
4 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component whose command  
or key label you want to clear.  
SELECT KEY flashes in the display.  
memo  
• To exit from the remote setup mode at any-  
time press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
• The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press any  
button to wake up the remote and continue  
the process.  
5 Press the button you want to clear.  
The button chosen will appear in the display. CLEAR?  
will appear in the display.  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select YES,  
NO or EXIT and press ENTER.  
YES: clears the setting.  
NO and EXIT: leaves the setting as is and returns you  
to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
If you select YES and press ENTER then COMPLETE  
appears in the display and you are returned to the  
REMOTE SETUP menu.  
7 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
You will exit the REMOTE SETUP menu and return to  
normal operation.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Resetting the Main Unit  
The following operations allow you to reset the unit to the default settings.  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-D2011  
1 While holding down the TONE  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MULTI CHANNNEL  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION  
button press the STANDBY/ON  
button for about three seconds.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
STEREO/DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MULTI JOG  
MASTER VOLUME  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2 When you see RESET? appear in  
the display, press the TONE –  
button. OK? appears in the display,  
press TONE +.  
1
1
When OK appears in the display all the settings,  
including the speaker, surround sound settings and  
tuner settings, will be reset in the unit to the default  
settings.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SET UP RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHARACTER/  
SEARCH  
EON  
MODE  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI JOG/ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
MIC  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
memo If the receiver is disconnected from a power  
source, or the main power is turned off, for  
about a month or longer it will reset to the  
default settings.  
2 2  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Other System Settings  
These settings are more advanced. Some could add depth or listenability to your sound (like the THX CINEMA  
setup) and others are for your convenience (like the FUNCTION RENAME). You can decide if you want to make  
these settings or not. They are not crucial to good surround sound. You only need to make these settings once  
(unless you change the placement of your current speaker system, add new speakers or components to your  
system, etc.). These setup operations use your TV to display the settings and choices so be sure your TV and  
receiver are properly hooked up. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote control  
to navigate the OSDs on your TV. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG dial and ENTER button, and  
look at the display, on the Front Panel.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
SETUP  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
Make sure your TV is set to the receiver.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
The menu possibilities appear on your TV.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
3
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
3 Follow the order below to make  
advance settings. Use the 5∞  
buttons to choose a menu. When  
you have the setup you want press  
ENTER.  
5
6
7
+10  
8
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
TUNING  
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
In each mode, the current settings are displayed  
automatically.  
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL+  
CHANNEL–  
THX CINEMA Setup (page 90)  
This setup lets you choose which decoding method  
the receiver will use for THX CINEMA.  
INPUT ASSIGN (pages 91-92)  
3 2  
If you hook up your digital components in a different  
way than the default settings you need to tell the  
receiver how you hooked them up so the names on  
the remote control and front panel match your home  
setup. Do this with the DIGITAL–IN SELECT setup.  
Also, if you hooked up video devices with component  
video cable you need to tell the receiver which devices  
are hook up in this way. Do this with the  
COMPONENT–IN SELECT setup.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
FUNCTION RENAME (page 93)  
This feature allows you to change the names that  
appear in the receiver display to reflect what you have  
connected.  
System Setup  
PHONO/LINE Setup (page 94)  
3
This feature allows you to hook up either a turntable or  
a line level component (like a CD player) to the same  
terminal. Use this setup to tell the receiver which you  
hooked up.  
[1. Surround Setup  
]
[2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
]
]
[5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
[Exit  
]
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
THX CINEMA Setup  
This setup lets you choose which decoding method for 2 channel sources the receiver will use for THX  
CINEMA. For more information on the decoding (playback) formats see "Techno Tidbits" starting on page 104.  
(If you are continuing from page 89 you can skip the  
first two steps.)  
SETUP  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
VCR1/  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select THX CINEMA SETUP. Press  
the ENTER button.  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
3-6  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
+
8
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to choose  
either PRO LOGIC ll MOVIE, PRO  
LOGIC or NEO:6 CINEMA as the  
decoding method. Press the ENTER  
button.  
3-6 2  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
The default is PRO LOGIC ll MOVIE.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
5 EXIT should be selected (if not, use  
the 5∞ buttons to select it). Press  
ENTER.  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT  
and press ENTER, again.  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns to  
normal operation.  
System Setup  
3
4
5
[1. Surround Setup  
]
]
]
]
]
]
[2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
[5. PHONO/LINE Setup  
[Exit  
2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[ PRO LOGIC II MOVIE ]  
[ PRO LOGIC  
[ Neo:6 CINEMA  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[ PRO LOGIC II MOVIE ]  
[ PRO LOGIC  
[ Neo:6 CINEMA  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Assigning the Digital Inputs  
If you did not hook up your digital equipment in accordance with the default settings for the digital inputs  
(see pages 17,19 & 22-23) you need to complete the procedure below. You have to do this in order to tell  
the receiver what digital equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote corre-  
spond to what you have hooked up.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
(If you are continuing from page 89 you can skip the  
first two steps.)  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
3-8  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
3-8 2  
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
4 DIGITAL-IN SELECT should be  
selected, if not use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to move  
through the different digital inputs  
and press the ENTER button.  
System Setup  
3
[ 1. Surround Setup  
[ 2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
]
[ 3. Input Assign  
[ 4. Function Rename  
]
]
6 Use the 5∞ buttons select the  
component that you hooked up to  
that digital in. Press the ENTER  
button.  
[ 5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
[ Exit  
]
4
5
3.Input Assign  
[ Digital-In Select  
If you're not sure which component is connected to  
which digital in, look on the back of the receiver and  
check the cables you connected.  
]
[ Component-In Select ]  
[Exit]  
7 When you're finished use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
Digital-In Select  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
[ TV/SAT ]  
[DVD/LD]  
This exits the DIGITAL-IN SELECT mode.  
[
[
OFF  
CD  
]
]
[Exit]  
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT  
and press ENTER. Then, use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER again.  
memo  
• The possible digital inputs that can be assigned  
are: DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VCR1, VCR2, CD, CD-R,  
MD.  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns to  
normal operation.  
• If you assign a digital input to a certain function  
(for example DVD/LD) then any digital inputs pre-  
viously assigned to that function will automati-  
cally be set to OFF. This is because one func-  
tion cannot be assigned to two different places.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Assigning the Component Video Inputs  
This receiver has two component video inputs. Their default settings are video inputs for the DVD/LD  
(COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1) and TV/SAT (COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2) functions, but you can reassign  
them if you want to use them as video inputs for other receiver functions (for example a VCR).  
See pages 16–19 for more on connecting equipment using component video cords.  
(If you are continuing from page 89 you can skip the  
first two steps.)  
VCR1/  
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
3-8  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
–
TUNING  
+
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
3-8 2  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
COMPONENT-IN SELECT then press  
ENTER.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
component video input you want to  
reassign. Press the ENTER button.  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to assign a  
receiver function.  
System Setup  
3
[ 1. Surround Setup  
[ 2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
[ 3. Input Assign  
[ 4. Function Rename  
]
Choose between DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VCR1 and VCR2.  
]
]
[ 5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
[ Exit  
]
7 When you're finished use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
3.Input Assign  
[ Digital-In Select  
You will leave the COMPONENT-IN SELECT mode.  
4
]
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT  
and press ENTER. Then, use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER again.  
[ Component-In Select ]  
[Exit]  
Component-In Select  
5
6
Component-1 [DVD/LD ]  
Component-2 [ TV/SAT ]  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns to  
normal operation.  
[
Exit  
]
Component-In Select  
Component-1 [ VCR1  
]
If you connect any source component to the  
Component-2 [ TV/SAT ]  
Exit  
memo  
[
]
receiver using a component video input, you  
should also have your TV connected to this  
receiver's component video output.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
FUNCTION RENAME  
Use the FUNCTION RENAME capability to rename the display on the receiver and your OSD for different  
functions (DVD, etc.). For example, you could rename VCR1/DVR as DVR-7000. For this particular setup using  
the controls on the front panel is more convenient than using the remote control. Use the MULTI JOG dial  
instead of the 5∞ buttons and use the ENTER button on the front panel. You can also use the display on the  
front panel as opposed to the OSD.  
3-9 2  
RETURN button  
5 Use the MULTI JOG to cycle the  
cursor through the letters,  
numbers and symbols. Use the  
ENTER button to enter one of the  
possibilities or move forward a  
space.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
MULTI-ROOM  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
The possible selections are shown below.  
(If you are continuing from page 89 you can skip  
the first two steps.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
1 Turn on the receiver and your  
TV. (If you want to use the  
remote control for this setup,  
press the RECEIVER button.)  
!”#$%&’()*+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]ˆ_{|} [space]  
6 Repeat step 5 until you get the  
name as you want it.  
2 Press the SET UP button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
MULTI-ROOM  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
LS  
You can input up to ten characters.  
This display appears on the receiver.  
7 Press ENTER repeatedly to exit  
the name. The new function  
name is set.  
3 Looking at the display on your  
receiver, use the MULTI JOG to  
select FUNCTION RENAME.  
Press the ENTER button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
MULTI-ROOM  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
LS  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
MULTI-ROOM  
SB CH  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
8 Repeat steps 4-7 to change other  
function names. Use the MULTI  
JOG to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
4 Use the MULTI JOG to select the  
name of the function (for  
example, DVD/LD) you want to  
change. Press ENTER.  
9 Use the MULTI JOG to select  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE DNR ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
SB CH  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns  
to normal operation.  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
RS  
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
Either the cursor underline bar or a character  
(depending on which is selected) will blink.  
The functions are divided into three different on-  
screen displays so you may have to move  
through them to find the function you want to  
rename.  
memo  
Use the RETURN button to move the  
cursor back one character when entering  
a name.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
PHONO/LINE Setup  
The PHONO/LINE setup allows you to decide whether you'll hook up a turntable or a line level component (most  
components, like CD players and DVD players, are line level).  
(If you are continuing from page 89 you can skip the  
first two steps.)  
VCR1/  
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
3-6  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select PHONO/LINE SETUP. Press  
the ENTER button.  
3-6 2  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
PHONO or LINE. Press ENTER.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
PHONO: Use this setting for turntables (without a built-  
in equalizer or pre-amplifier).  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
LINE: Use this setting for all audio components other  
than a turntable and for turntables with a built-in phono  
equalizer.  
5 EXIT should be selected (if not, use  
the 5∞ buttons to select it). Press  
ENTER.  
System Setup  
3
[ 1. Surround Setup  
]
]
]
]
]
]
[ 2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[ 3. Input Assign  
[ 4. Function Rename  
[ 5. PHONO/LINE Setup  
[Exit  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT  
and press ENTER, again.  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns to  
normal operation.  
5.PHONO/LINE Setup  
[PHONO ]  
4
5
memo  
The default is PHONO.  
[LINE  
Exit  
]
]
[
5.PHONO/LINE Setup  
[PHONO ]  
[LINE  
Exit  
]
]
[
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Expert Setup  
The settings here can only be done if you've performed the more basic preliminary setups. Thus, before doing  
these settings do either AUTO setup (page 13–15), QUICK setup (page 38) or NORMAL setup (page 39-43).  
These settings are to further heighten your surround sound. They are not absolutely necessary but may give  
more defined and enjoyable surround sound. You can decide if you want to make these settings or not. You only  
need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system, add new  
speakers or components to your system, etc.). These setup operations use your TV to display the settings and  
choices so be sure your TV and receiver are properly hooked up. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER  
button on the remote control to navigate the OSDs on your TV. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG  
dial and ENTER button, and look at the display, on the Front Panel.  
VCR1/  
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
TV CONT  
DVR  
MULTI CONTROL  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
CD  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
MD/  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
TAPE2  
1
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
7
+10  
8
Make sure your TV is set to the receiver.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
HI-BIT  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
GUIDE  
TOP MENU  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
The menu possibilities appear on your TV.  
3-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
3 SURROUND SETUP should be  
selected (if it's not use the 5∞  
buttons to select it). Press the  
ENTER button.  
3-5 2  
STANDBY/ON  
4 Select EXPERT with the 5∞ buttons.  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
Press the ENTER button.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
5 Follow the order below to make  
expert settings. Use the 5∞ buttons  
to navigate through the menus.  
When you have the setting you want  
in particular menu, press ENTER.  
System Setup  
3
In each mode, the current settings are displayed on  
the screen.  
[1. Surround Setup  
[2. THX CINEMA Setup ]  
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
[5. PHONO/LINE Setup ]  
]
]
]
CROSSOVER NETWORK (page 96)  
[Exit  
]
This feature determines which frequencies will be sent  
to the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL (page 97)  
This feature balances the sound output level of your  
speakers more finely than in the NORMAL setup.  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY (page 98)  
This feature adjusts the delay level of your speakers  
more finely than in the NORMAL setup.  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ (pages 99–101)  
1.Surround Setup  
[ SurrBack System ]  
4
5
[ Auto Setting  
[ Quick  
[ Normal  
[ Expert  
[ Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
This feature allows you to adjust the amount of a  
certain frequency in a soundtrack, acting as a kind of  
room equalizer for your speakers.  
BASS PEAK LEVEL (page 102)  
Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low  
bass tones. Set the bass peak level as needed to  
prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the  
sound from the speakers.  
Expert  
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (page 103)  
This feature makes possible excellent surround sound  
effects when listening to Dolby Digital and DTS  
sources at low volumes.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
CROSSOVER NETWORK  
Crossover frequency is the point where the receiver divides the high and low sounds (the frequencies) between  
the speakers. Certain bass sounds will play back from the subwoofer if you selected it as YES (or PLUS) or from  
the front speakers if you selected them as LARGE. This setting decides where the cutoff will be between those  
bass sounds playing back from the speaker selected as above and the bass sounds for the entire soundtrack,  
which play back from all speakers used.  
If all speakers are set to LARGE (see pages 40–41) this setup is unnecessary.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 95, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
1 CROSSOVER NETWORK should be  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-3  
RETURN  
MPX  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
frequency cut off point. Press  
ENTER.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
1-3  
Frequencies below the cut off point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or large speakers). For example, choosing  
50 Hz sends bass frequencies below 50 Hz to the  
subwoofer (or large speakers).  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
3 EXIT should be selected (if it's not  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it).  
Press ENTER.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
Next, proceed to FINE CHANNEL LEVEL.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
start over from step 1.  
Expert  
1
2
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
memo  
]
]
]
]
]
]
The default is 80Hz.  
Crossover Network  
Frequency  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
50Hz  
80Hz  
100Hz  
150Hz  
200Hz  
Exit  
(THX Speaker  
=
80Hz)  
Crossover Network  
3
Frequency  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
50Hz  
80Hz  
100Hz  
150Hz  
200Hz  
Exit  
(THX Speaker  
=
80Hz)  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL  
The following steps show you how to balance the sound output level of your speakers more finely than in the  
NORMAL setup (see page 42). Proper speaker balance is essential for obtaining high quality surround sound and  
the better the speaker balance the better surround sound you can get. Do this procedure if you want to try and  
get even finer surround sound.  
The main difference with this setup method and the CHANNEL LEVEL setup method in NORMAL setup is that  
here the test tone alternates between the front left speaker (which is used as the reference channel) and the  
target speaker (that is, the speaker whose level you want to adjust). Listen to the two tones and try to make  
them the same volume.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 95, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
1 FINE CHANNEL LEVEL should be  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
channel you want to adjust. Press  
ENTER.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
1-5  
Test tones will be output.  
WARNING : Be prepared! The test tones are output  
at a high volume level.  
MASTER VOLUME rotates to the reference position (0  
dB) and the display on the receiver flashes TEST TONE.  
After a few seconds the test tone is output.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
3 Adjust the level of the channel using  
the 5∞ buttons.  
Try to get the volume level of the target speaker to  
match that of the front left speaker, which is the  
reference in this setup. The levels can be set within a  
range of –10 dB to +10 dB in 0.5 dB steps.  
When you press ENTER you will automatically go to  
the next channel.  
Expert  
1
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
4 Press ENTER to select a new  
channel. Repeat step 3 for every  
channel.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Use the 5∞ buttons to go back to the channel you  
want to adjust and press ENTER. Then follow step 3.  
STD:Front  
L
Fine Channel Lev+el1. 5  
dB  
2
3
Front  
R
Center  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+1. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-1. 5dB  
5 When done select EXIT (if it's not  
already selected) and press ENTER.  
Next, if you want, proceed to FINE CHANNEL DELAY.  
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
L
R
L
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
+10. 0dB  
R
[
Exit  
]
Fine Channel Lev+el1. 5  
dB  
STD:Front  
L
Fine Channel Lev+el1. 5  
dB  
5
STD:Front  
L
Front  
R
Center  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+2. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-1. 5dB  
+2. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-1. 5dB  
R
Center  
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
+10. 0dB  
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
+10. 0dB  
R
[
Exit  
]
[
Exit  
]
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY  
The following steps show you how to adjust the delay level of your speakers more finely than in the NORMAL  
setup (see page 43). Adding a slight delay to some speakers is necessary to achieve proper sound depth,  
separation as well as an effective surround sound effect. Do this procedure if you want to try and get even finer  
surround sound.  
The main difference with this setup method and the CHANNEL DELAY setup method in NORMAL setup is that  
here the test tone sounds from a reference channel and you use that to measure the target speaker (that is, the  
speaker whose level you want to adjust).  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 95, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
1 FINE CHANNEL DELAY should be  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-6  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
TUNING  
8
–
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
TEXT OFF CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
–
STATION  
+
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust the  
distance of the FRONT L channel.  
Press ENTER.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
1-6  
Test tones will be output.  
This channel will be the target reference which you  
use to measure the other channels.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
channel you want to adjust. Press  
ENTER.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
Test tones will be output for the channel you want to  
adjust and a reference channel.  
Listen to the reference channel and use to measure  
the target channel.  
Expert  
1
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
4 Adjust the distance of each channel  
using the 5∞ buttons.  
Listen to the reference  
channel and use it to measure  
the target channel. Stand  
facing the two speakers with  
your arms outstretched  
pointing at each speaker. Try  
Fine Channel Delay  
2
3
to make the two tones sound  
L
Front  
[
]
3. 0m  
as if they are arriving simultaneously at a postion  
slightly in front of you and between your arm span.  
The distance can be set within a range of 0.1 m to 9.0  
m in 0.1 m steps.  
Fine Channel Delay  
STD:Front  
L
3. 0m  
When you press ENTER you will automatically go to  
the next channel.  
Front  
R
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
3. 0m  
3. 3m  
2. 4m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
1. 5m  
4. 0m  
Center  
]
]
]
]
]
]
L
R
L
R
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
5 Press ENTER to select a new  
channel. Repeat step 4 for every  
channel.  
[
Exit  
]
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Use the 5∞ buttons to go back to the channel you  
want to adjust and press ENTER. Then follow step 3.  
Fine Channel Delay  
6
STD:Front  
L
3. 0m  
Front  
R
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
3. 0m  
3. 3m  
2. 4m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
1. 5m  
4. 0m  
Center  
]
]
]
]
]
]
L
R
L
R
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
6 When done select EXIT (if it's not  
already selected) and press ENTER.  
Next, if you want, proceed to ACOUSTIC CAL EQ.  
[
Exit  
]
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ  
This setting is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers and is set automatically if you did the AUTO  
SURROUND SOUND SETUP (see pages 13–15), which we strongly recommend. It balances the frequency  
response between your speakers. In order to follow the instructions in this section you should have done AUTO  
SURROUND SOUND SETUP on pages 13–15.  
This receiver lets you choose between two types of ACOUSTIC CAL EQ equalizer curves: ALL CH ADJUST and  
FRONT ALIGN, with the former equalizing the speakers individually and the latter equalizing the speakers in  
accordance with the front speakers. Features here allow you to put in your own equalizer preferences. To do  
this use the DATA COPY feature to copy the settings in ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN modes and paste  
them into CUSTOM 1 or CUSTOM 2. You then choose between the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN types  
of curves and increase the amount of a certain frequency in each speaker in accordance with your preferences.  
When you playback a source you can choose CUSTOM 1 or CUSTOM 2 to apply your preferences to playback.  
When setting up using the ALL CH ADJUST mode you can adjust each speaker individually. With the FRONT  
ALIGN mode the front speakers will serve as the reference so you cannot adjust them.  
The DATA CHECK feature allows you to see how the settings in ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN currently  
stand.  
When you use ACOUSTIC CAL EQ function (see page 50) you can toggle between the two basic settings, ALL  
CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN, and the variations you set yourself, CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2.  
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
To start the process use DATA COPY to paste the ALL  
CH ADJUST or FRONT ALIGN settings into CUSTOM 1  
or CUSTOM 2.  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 95, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
–
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
–
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
1 ACOUSTIC CAL EQ should be  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
1-5  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select DATA  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
COPY. Press ENTER.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
CUSTOM 1 or CUSTOM 2 as the  
destination you want to copy the  
data to. Press ENTER.  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select ALL  
CH ADJUST or FRONT ALIGN as the  
type of curve you want to copy.  
Press ENTER.  
Expert  
1
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
When you press ENTER the data is copied to the  
destination you chose.  
After you have done this process once you can also  
copy data in CUSTOM 1 or CUSTOM 2.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
5 When done select EXIT (if it's not  
already selected) and press ENTER.  
2
3
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
CUSTOM1 ADJUST  
CUSTOM2 ADJUST  
DATA COPY  
DATA CHECK  
Exit  
You can now adjust the settings in CUSTOM 1 or  
CUSTOM 2.  
EQ DATA COPY  
CUSTOM1  
EQ DATA COPY  
CUSTOM1  
4
[
]
NOT DATA COPY  
[
]
]
FRONT ALIGN  
CUSTOM2  
[
CUSTOM2  
[
]
ALL CH ADJUST  
ALL CH ADJUST  
[
Exit]  
[
Exit]  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
This explanation is for CUSTOM 1 or CUSTOM 2.  
For explanation purposes  
the illustrations use ALL  
CH ADJUST.  
1 The four possibilities should be on the  
OSD. Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
CUSTOM 1 or CUSTOM 2. Press ENTER.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
1
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
CUSTOM1 ADJUST  
CUSTOM2 ADJUST  
DATA COPY  
DATA CHECK  
Exit  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select ALL CH  
ADJUST or FRONT ALIGN and press  
ENTER.  
The test tones will sound.  
WARNING: the test tones are very loud!! Make sure  
there are no infants or small children in the room and that  
no one who will be scared, upset or damaged by loud noise  
is present. You yourself may want to wear earplugs.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
2
3
4
[
[
[
]
]
]
ALL CH ADJUST  
FRONT ALIGN  
Exit  
Here the terms ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN  
represent two types of equalizer methods that emphasize  
different characteristics of the sound.  
ALL CH ADJUST: In this method all the speakers (except  
for the subwoofer) are independent. The settings that  
were input when you did the AUTO SURROUND  
SOUND SETUP (see pages 13-15) will be present but you  
can adjust each speaker individually to suit your taste.  
The test tones for each channel will sound individually.  
ALL CH ADJUST  
L
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Front  
Center  
Front  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
FRONT ALIGN: In this method all speakers (except for  
the subwoofer) are set in accordance with the settings  
of the FRONT speakers. The settings that were input  
when you did the AUTO SURROUND SOUND SETUP  
(see pages 13-15) will be present but you can adjust  
each speaker individually to suit your taste. This setting  
allows the listener to enjoy a sound balance defined by  
the front speakers. The front left speaker will serve as  
the reference tone. The front left tone and the target  
speaker (the one you are trying to adjust) will sound in  
turns, so you can judge which needs to be louder.  
Exit  
]
Center EQ  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
4 kHz  
11.3 kHz  
TRIM  
Exit]  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 5dB  
-4. 0dB  
-5. 5dB  
+0. 5dB  
+0. 0dB  
[
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the channel  
that you want to adjust. Press ENTER.  
Center EQ  
For FRONT ALIGN you won't be able to adjust the FRONT  
speakers.  
5
[
]
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
4 kHz  
+2. 0dB  
+2. 5dB  
-4. 0dB  
-5. 5dB  
+0. 5dB  
+0. 0dB  
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
frequency you want to adjust. Press  
ENTER.  
11.3 kHz  
TRIM  
[
Exit]  
For the speakers you set to SMALL (see page 41) you won't  
be able to adjust the 63 Hz setting.  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust the  
frequency. When you have it at the level  
you want press ENTER.  
Set the frequencies within the –6 dB to +6 dB range in steps  
of 0.5 dB. If OVER appears in the display you have set the  
levels too high. Reduce them until OVER disappears.  
6 The cursor automatically goes to the  
next frequency. Press ENTER and repeat  
steps 4 & 5 to adjust all the frequencies.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Center EQ  
7
9
7 TRIM should be selected (if it isn’t use the  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
4 kHz  
+2. 0dB  
+2. 5dB  
-4. 0dB  
-5. 5dB  
+0. 5dB  
+1. 0dB  
5∞ buttons to select it) and press ENTER.  
11.3 kHz  
TRIM  
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust the TRIM  
[
Exit]  
and press ENTER.  
TRIM will balance the volume level of each frequency in the  
overall volume of that speaker.  
Center EQ  
9 EXIT should be selected (if it isn’t use the  
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
4 kHz  
+2. 0dB  
+2. 5dB  
-4. 0dB  
-5. 5dB  
+0. 5dB  
+0. 0dB  
[
[
[
[
[
5∞ buttons to select it) and press ENTER.  
11.3 kHz  
TRIM  
[
Exit  
]
10 The cursor automatically goes to the next  
channel. Press ENTER and repeat steps 3  
– 8 to adjust all the channels.  
11 EXIT should be selected (if it isn’t use the  
5∞ buttons to select it) and press ENTER.  
Leave the setup by using the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
pressing ENTER. You can now go to DATA CHECK or leave the  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ setting by using the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and pressing ENTER.  
To use the DATA CHECK feature follow the steps here.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
1
2
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
CUSTOM1 ADJUST  
CUSTOM2 ADJUST  
DATA COPY  
DATA CHECK  
Exit  
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select DATA  
CHECK. Press ENTER.  
2 Select either ALL CH ADJUST or FRONT  
ALIGN as the data you want to check.  
Press ENTER.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
[
[
[
]
]
]
ALL CH ADJUST  
FRONT ALIGN  
Exit  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the channel  
that you want to check. Press ENTER.  
That channel appears so you can check the setting.  
4 When that channel has been checked, use  
the 5∞ buttons to select the EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
ALL CH ADJUST  
L
3
4
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Front  
Center  
Front  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
R
5 Repeat step 3 & 4 to check all the  
channels.  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Exit  
]
6 When all channels have been checked  
select EXIT (if it's not already selected)  
and press ENTER.  
Center EQ  
Leave the setup by using the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
pressing ENTER. You can now go to another ACOUSTIC CAL  
EQ setting by using the 5∞ buttons and pressing ENTER.  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
4 kHz  
11.3 kHz  
TRIM  
Exit]  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 5dB  
-4. 0dB  
-5. 5dB  
+0. 5dB  
+0. 0dB  
[
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
BASS PEAK LEVEL  
The LFE (Low Frequency Effect) channel in Dolby Digital and DTS program sources can produce heavily  
concentrated ultra-low bass tones that may exceed the capabilities of your speaker system. The following steps  
show you how to limit the peak level for the LFE channel. If continuing from the preceding page the BASS PEAK  
LEVEL should be selected.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 95, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
1 BASS PEAK LEVEL should be  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
SETTING START or SETTING  
CANCEL. Press ENTER.  
1-5  
SETTING START: The MASTER VOLUME is set to  
MIN (–––dB), a test tone plays back and you make the  
setting (go to step 3).  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI JOG  
SETTING CANCEL: This setting won't limit the peak  
level of the LFE channel.  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
If you selected SETTING CANCEL go to step 4.  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust the  
test tone and specify the bass peak  
level.  
1
Expert  
1 Raise the level gradually.  
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
2 Set the bass peak level at the point just before the  
tone starts to distort.  
Be careful! Test tones play back at loud volumes .  
Make sure there are no infants or small children in  
the room.  
You can leave this setup any time by pressing  
ENTER.  
Bass Peak Level  
2
[Setting Start ]  
[Setting Cancel ]  
If the YES or PLUS setting on the subwoofer is  
selected the test tone will only play back from the  
subwoofer. If not, the test tone will play back from all  
speakers set to LARGE except for the subwoofer.  
[Exit ]  
4 Press ENTER.  
The display on the receiver will show FADE and then  
RESUME while the MASTER VOLUME returns to its  
original position.  
Bass Peak Level  
3
[Setting OK ]  
Bass Peak Level  
[–80]  
5 EXIT should be selected (if it isn’t  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it),  
press ENTER.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Start over from step 1.  
Next, if you want, proceed to DYNAMIC RANGE  
CONTROL  
If you set this level before the receiver  
will have that level input but it will not  
appear on this setup screen. (The  
screen will always open with the level  
showing [- - -].)  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL  
This feature makes it possible to enjoy full surround sound effects on Dolby Digital and DTS sources even at low  
volumes. It does this by compressing the dynamic range. Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest  
and the softest sounds in any given signal. Compressing the range plays sounds so the quieter ones are audible  
and the louder ones don’t get distorted or become overpowering. This feature only applies to Dolby Digital and  
DTS sources but the MIDNIGHT mode (explained on page 51) accomplishes the same end for a variety of  
sources. If continuing from BASS PEAK LEVEL, DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL should be selected.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 95, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1
2
DNR  
3
4
SIGNAL SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
5
6
HI-BIT  
7
+10  
8
–
ENTER  
VIDEO SEL  
DISC  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS SEARCH MODE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
1 D-RANGE CONTROL should be  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
TOP MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
AUDIO  
TRACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
1-6  
RETURN  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
MPX  
TEXT ON RF ATT  
DISP MODE  
SUB TITLE  
8
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to choose either  
1-6  
OFF, MID or MAX. Press ENTER.  
Dynamic Range Control is set.  
OFF: No Dynamic Range Control.  
MID: A moderate amount of Dynamic Range Control is  
applied.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MAX: The most Dynamic Range Control available is  
applied.  
MULTI JOG  
MULTI JOG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
3 EXIT should be selected (if it isn’t  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it),  
press ENTER.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Start over from step 1.  
Expert  
1
2
3
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
4 You are now finished with EXPERT  
SETUP, EXIT should be selected (if it  
isn’t use the 5∞ buttons to select  
it), press ENTER.  
5 EXIT in SURROUND SETUP menu  
should be selected (if it isn’t use the  
5∞ buttons to select it), press  
ENTER.  
Dynamic Range Control  
Select Mode  
dts  
[OFF]  
[
[
[
MID  
MAX  
]
]
Exit  
]
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT in  
the SYSTEM SETUP menu, press  
ENTER.  
The receiver returns to normal operation.  
Dynamic Range Control  
Select Mode  
dts  
[OFF]  
[
[
[
MID  
MAX  
]
]
memo  
Exit  
]
The default is OFF.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Dolby  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a discrete digital surround format used for multichannel surround sound. It was developed after  
the Dolby Surround system and Dolby Pro Logic Surround system. Dolby Digital is a high quality digital sound  
format that is used by many theatrical film releases.  
Soundtracks using linear PCM audio generate too much  
data for multichannel use. Dolby Digital technology was  
developed in response to the need for efficient  
4 channel analog  
5.1 channel  
multichannel digital sound. It uses masking technology and  
Adaptive Transform Coding, resulting in no audible loss of  
sound quality. In the present age of digital sound Dolby  
Digital is a standard audio format for DVD and has been  
adopted by HDTV broadcasts throughout the USA.  
Other features include:  
1) Downmixing on playback for compatibility with mono,  
stereo, Dolby Pro Logic and 5.1 channel audio.  
2) A wide range of bitrates and channels.  
3) Decoding dynamic range information and adjusting the  
dialog level in the soundtrack (called Dialog Normalization,  
see below for more information).  
Dolby  
Digital  
Dolby Digital for movie  
The advantages of the Dolby Digital system of encoding  
allow it to maintain its high quality sound while at the same  
time being very flexible, with the ability to handle many  
different types of soundtracks.  
Dialog Normalization  
When a Dolby Digital soundtrack is played back the Dialog Normalization function of the receiver activates auto-  
matically. Dialog Normalization is a Dolby Digital function that establishes the average dialog level for the program  
source being played. If the receiver's level does not match the average dialog level, first you see "DIAL NORM" and  
"OFFSET +4 dB" (as an example) appear in the receiver's display. In this example, the number +4 dB is the differ-  
ence between the receiver's gain structure and the Dolby Digital average dialog level. To match the average dialog  
level, subtract or add the OFFSET level. For example, if the OFFSET level is +4 dB, the amplifier's output is 4 dB  
over the average recorded level.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved version of Dolby Pro Logic technology with extended matrix decoding  
technology that can create 5.1 channel sound from two channel sources. Dolby Pro Logic II creates basic 5  
channel sound by using the innovative "steering logic" circuit. Therefore when listening to typical two-channel  
sources like CD, the listener can enjoy a richer spatial effect. When using software encoded with Dolby  
Surround, this decoding system affords the listener an improved surround experience with greater sound detail.  
Chart Comparing Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic II  
Effective sound source  
Dolby Surround encoded sources  
All two channel stereo sources  
Surround Sound  
Frequency Range  
Mono  
Stereo  
Surround within 7 kHz  
All Channels/Full Range  
This unit has a three Dolby Pro Logic II functions. The first is "MOVIE Mode" (suitable for film soundtracks);  
"MUSIC Mode" (suitable for music); "Pro Logic Mode" (this mode is less sensitive to the quality of the source  
material, so may be useful when MOVIE Mode or MUSIC Mode do not give good results). One can select one  
of them depending on your soundtrack of choice.  
• For receivers and components other than the VSX-D2011 Dolby Pro Logic II may not have the  
104  
memo  
above mentioned functions.  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
This new recording technology is able to play 6.1 channel sound and was developed in a collaboration between  
Dolby Laboratories and Lucasfilm, Ltd. for the film "Stars Wars: The First Episode", the first movie ever to be  
made with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology. In a movie theater this format affords the listener vivid  
surround sound experience replete with the effect of sounds flying overhead, even for those seated towards the  
sides of the theater.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX contains surround back channels which are dubbed into the soundtrack in studio. The  
channels are encoded into the left and right channels of the soundtrack so this format can be compatible with  
Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding. For a list of movies that contain Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks see  
Dolby website at: http://www.dolby.com  
THX Surround EX technology was developed for movie theater use originally but has been extended for home  
theater use and consumers can no benefit from this excellent, realistic sound format. (For more details see "THX  
Surround EX" on the next page.) This unit is equipped with a THX Surround EX decoder.  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS has been adopted as a sound recording format in the movie theaters since the release of “JURASSIC  
PARK” in 1993, and has a good reputation for high quality sound and dynamic surround effects.  
In this system, 6 channels of digital sound are recorded on CD-ROM. DTS adopts a simultaneous playback  
format. With a low rate of compression of sound signals and a high rate of transmittance, a higher sound quality  
format is produced. For this reason, the format is being introduced in more and more movie theaters, and is  
being adopted for home use as DTS Digital Surround. When used with movies it's called DTS-LD DVD and for  
music software (5.1 channel CD) as DTS-CD .  
DTS-ES  
DTS launched a new surround format in November 2000. This has come to be known as DTS Extended  
Surround or simply DTS-ES. The technology has been advanced to include two new home formats DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 format, and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ch format, both are able to playback discrete, 6.1-channel content  
from DVDs and CDs. Both of these formats are compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 ch decoder. In this  
system each channel is encoded and decoded individually, adding to the separation of the channels. Since DTS  
adds a third surround channel, the surround back channel, the realism and all-encompassing nature of the sound  
reaches levels not seen before in home theater. This unit is equipped with a DTS-ES decoder.  
DTS Neo:6  
This is a matrix decoding technology that transforms two-channel sources into 6.0 channel surround sound.  
There are two modes, CINEMA MODE and MUSIC MODE.  
DTS 96/24  
This high-quality format will be used for software which will be available from November, 2001. For compatibility  
with equipment that was produced before this format was made, DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1ch decoder. This unit is equipped with a DTS 96 kHz/24 bit decoder to take advantage of  
the higher sound quality available.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
THX  
THX is a Lucasfilm, Ltd. program dedicated to maximum accuracy in movie presentation. Movie sound tracks are  
recorded in large movie dubbing stages using movie theater equipment. For a sound track to be presented  
accurately in your home, special technologies are required. In your home the room is much smaller and has a  
bright sound, the speakers are very different and there are only six-eight of them, plus, you sit much closer to  
each one of those speakers. Because of these differences we often miss the power and emotion that thrills us  
in a good movie. Now Pioneer and THX have teamed up to bring the full glory of accurate cinema sound to the  
comfort and convenience of your home.  
Re-Equalization™ : In a theater the room is very large and dead sounding, you sit a long way back from the  
speakers and the speakers themselves are very specialized. Because a sound track recorded in this dead  
sounding space when it is played at home it sounds overbright. THX Re-Equalization adjusts for this difference in  
a very precise way.  
Adaptive Decorrelation™ : When a sound track sends mono sound to the surround speakers it often seems to  
be coming come from one side instead of from all around you as it would in a theater. Adaptive Decorrelation  
helps to correct this inaccuracy.  
Timbre Matching™ : When recording a sound track it is very important that the surround sounds move  
smoothly and seamlessly around the theater. It is very distracting when sounds seem to jump from speaker to  
speaker. Timbre Matching helps to smooth the movement of the surround sounds even though you are using  
only two speakers.  
Bass Peak Level Manager™ : Some Dolby Digital sound tracks can produce bass peaks that are undesirable in  
a home theater environment. The Bass Peak Level Manager allows you to set the maximum peak levels  
appropriate to your system. (Set this function according to the Bass Peak Level instructions on page 102.)  
Loudspeaker Position Time Synchronization™ : This feature allows you to adjust for the difference in the  
distance from each individual loudspeaker to the listening position. Doing this ensures that all the speakers  
operate in precise synchronization improving the seamless nature of the soundfield. (Set this function according  
to the Channel Delay or Fine Channel Delay instructions on pages 43 and 98, respectively.)  
THX Surround EX™ : THX Surround EX–Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories  
and the THX division of Lucasfilm Ltd.  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able  
to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center,  
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the  
opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before.  
When released to the home consumer market, movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology, may have a note to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can  
be found on the Dolby web site at http://www.dolby.com.  
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,  
faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the "THX Surround EX" mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is  
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will  
be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Schemata of Setup Screens  
1.Surround Setup  
1
SurrBack System  
[
[
[
[
[
[
SurrBack System  
Auto Setting  
Quick  
Normal  
Expert  
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
[
[
[
Normal System  
Secound Zone  
Front Bi-Amp  
Exit  
]
]
]
]
Exit  
Auto Surround Setup  
Set microphone  
Turn on subwoofer  
2
3
2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[
[
[
[
PRO LOGIC II MOVIE ]  
[
[
Start  
]
PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Exit  
]
]
]
Cancel  
]
Speaker Setting  
[
Free  
]
]
QUICK  
[ THX  
Subwoofer  
Center SP  
SurrBack SP  
Room size  
Listening Position  
Center  
[ YES]  
[ YES]  
[ YES]  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[Exit]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[
Medium  
]
]
X
[SMALL 2]  
[
YES  
]
Digital-In Select  
[
3.Input Assign  
[Exit]  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
[ TV/SAT ]  
[DVD/LD]  
[
[
[
[
Digital-In Select  
Component-In Select  
]
]
OFF  
CD  
]
]
Channel Level  
Test Tone  
[Exit]  
[Exit]  
[Manual]  
[Auto]  
Normal  
[
Exit  
]
[
[
[
[
Speaker Setting  
]
]
]
]
Channel Level  
Channel Delay  
Exit  
Component-In Select  
System Setup  
Component-1 [DVD/LD  
Component-2 [ TV/SAT  
]
]
[1. Surround Setup  
[2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
[5. PHONO/LINE Setup  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
Exit  
]
Channel Delay  
L
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
3. 0m  
2. 7m  
3. 0m  
2. 7m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
2. 4m  
3. 3m  
Center  
R
Front  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Exit  
]
4.Function Rename  
4
5
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
F.VIDEO  
PHONO/LINE  
CD  
CD-R/TAPE1  
MD/TAPE2  
USB  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
F.VIDEO  
PHONO  
CD  
CDR/TAPE1  
MD/TAPE2  
USB  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Crossover Network  
Expert  
Frequency  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
50Hz  
80Hz  
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
100Hz  
150Hz  
200Hz  
Exit  
[Exit  
]
(THX Speaker  
Fine Channel  
=
80Hz)  
STD:Front  
L
Lev+el1.  
5
dB  
5.PHONO/LINE Setup  
[PHONO ]  
Front  
R
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+1.  
5
5
0
5
0
0
0
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
Center  
[
+1.  
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[
L
R
L
+2.  
[
-1.  
[LINE  
Exit  
]
]
[
+3.  
[
[
R
+2.  
[
+10.  
[
Exit  
]
Fine Channel Delay  
STD:Front  
L
3. 0m  
Front  
R
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
3. 0m  
3. 3m  
2. 4m  
2. 1m  
1. 8m  
1. 5m  
4. 0m  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Center  
L
R
L
R
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[
Exit  
]
EQ DATA COPY  
CUSTOM1  
[
]
]
FRONT ALIGN  
CUSTOM2  
[
ALL CH ADJUST  
[
Exit]  
Bass Peak Level  
[Setting Start  
]
[Setting Cancel  
]
[Exit  
]
Dynamic Range Control  
Select Mode  
dts  
[OFF]  
[
[
[
MID  
MAX  
]
]
Exit  
]
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Speaker Placement Information  
Placement of your speakers is a crucial aspect of attaining accurate and realistic surround sound.  
Certain pointers concerning speakers stands, direction, angle and distance of speakers will be useful  
in this regard.  
Firstly, it is best not to put your speakers directly on the floor. If you do this some of the sound vibra-  
tion (especially bass) will go directly into the flooring and be lost. Instead we recommend using ex-  
tremely hard objects (like cinder blocks) or designated speaker stands to support your speakers. Avoid  
placing the speakers on soft (like cushions or sofas) as these will also lead to sound loss and unstable  
surfaces (like flimsy shelving) as they may cause speaker accidents. In order to achieve a surround  
sound effect, make sure the speakers are a reasonable distance from your main listening position.  
Follow the diagrams and instructions below for optimum placement of each set of speakers.  
C
C
F R  
C
F L  
F R  
F L  
F R  
F L  
45~60  
If you're using a CENTER speaker  
set the FRONT speakers to a wider  
angle. If not, set them to a narrower  
angle.  
It is best to angle the speakers  
towards the listening position.  
The angle depends on the size  
of the room. Use less angle for  
bigger rooms.  
Make sure the CENTER speaker  
does not cross the forward plane  
of the FRONT speakers.  
90~120  
90~120  
S R  
S R  
S L  
S R  
S R  
S L  
S L  
S R  
S L  
0~60  
S L  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
S B  
Surround speakers should be  
Surround back speakers should also be positioned 45 cm–90 cm higher  
positioned 45 cm–90 cm higher than than your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers  
your ears and titledslight downward. don't face each other. For DVD Audio the speakers should be more  
Make sure the speakers don't face  
each other. For DVD Audio the  
speakers should be more directly  
behind the listener than  
directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.  
for home theater playback.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Speaker Placement for a Complete THX Speaker System  
If you have a complete THX Speaker System set (LucasFilm authorized), follow the diagram below to  
place your speakers.  
Notice the surround speakers should output at an angle parallel to the listener. Also, notice the angle  
of the front speakers.  
FL  
C
FR  
Di-polar Radiating Speaker  
SL  
SR  
Surround  
Surround  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround Back  
Speaker Placement for DVD-Audio (etc.) Sources  
The best speaker placement for DVD-Audio (and other multichannel music sources) may be different  
than for regular DVD discs. For these formats follow the diagram at right as opposed to the home  
theater setups of the preceding pages.  
60˚  
120˚  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
Power  
The power does not turn on.  
• The power plug is disconnected.  
• The protection circuit may have been  
activated.  
• Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.  
• Disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet, and insert again.  
During loud playback the  
power suddenly switches  
off.  
• The protection circuit has been activated  
because the lowest actual impedance of  
the speakers (as opposed to the speakers’  
rated impedance) is dangerously low.  
• Turn down the volume.  
• When it’s convenient go to ACOUSTIC  
CALIBRATION EQ (pages 99–101) and  
lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels  
using MANUAL setting.  
The unit does not respond  
when the buttons are  
pressed.  
• Static electricity caused by dry air.  
• Switch the unit off, then on again.  
• Disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet, and insert again.  
During operation, the unit  
suddenly switches off.  
• The speaker wires are frayed or sticking  
out of the jack, and are touching the back of  
the receiver or another set of wires.  
• Reinsert the speaker wires, making sure  
there are no stray strands of wire and that  
they are inserted fully (see page 25).  
AMP ERR blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off. The STANDBY indicator  
will blink and the unit  
cannot be turned on.  
• The receiver probably has a serious  
problem.  
• Don't try to turn on the receiver. Call a  
Pioneer-accredited repair center to look at  
the problem.  
FAN STOP blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off.  
• Something is stuck in the fan and/or the  
fan is broken.  
• Remove the foreign object from the fan.  
If you can't do this and/or the fan is broken  
call a Pioneer-accredited repair center to  
look at the problem.  
OVERHEAT blinks in the  
display and no sound is  
output.  
• The receiver has gotten too hot.  
• Turn the receiver off and allow it to cool  
down with good ventilation. It is very likely  
that you have a heat dispersal and ventilation  
problem so please follow the instructions in  
“Installing the Receiver” (page 8) carefully.  
THDCT NG blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off.  
• The thermistor (temperature sensor) is  
broken.  
• Turn the receiver off, unplug from wall  
and call a Pioneer-accredited repair center  
to look at the problem.  
Setup  
The setup screen doesn't  
appear.  
• The output jacks haven't been connected  
properly.  
• Check all connections (see pages 16-23).  
• The TV hasn't been connected to the  
MONITOR OUT 1 jack.  
• Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT 1  
jacks (see page 16).  
• Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT 1  
jacks (see page 16).  
• You connected your TV to the MONITOR  
OUT 2 jack instead of the MONITOR OUT 1  
jack.  
• The PAL/NTSC setting is incorrect.  
• Select the correct PAL/NTSC setting (see  
page 8).  
Every time AUTO  
• The room environment is not optimal for  
auto setup (too much ambient noise;  
obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone; the monitor noise is  
• Make sure the room environment is in  
line with the guidelines for auto setup in  
this manual (see pages 13–14, memos on  
page 15).  
SURROUND SOUND SETUP  
is attempted, there is some  
kind of error, or the settings  
seem incorrect.  
interferring with the setup; etc.).  
The LARGE and SMALL  
settings for speakers after  
the AUTO SURROUND  
• There are other frequencies in the room  
that are affecting the auto setup.  
• Check for household appliances (air  
conditioner, fan, etc.) that may be affecting  
the environment and switch them off if  
necessary.  
SOUND SETUP are incorrect.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
After the proper settings  
have been made, there still  
seems to be something  
wrong with the sound.  
• The speakers have been incorrectly  
connected (left and right connections are  
reversed).  
• Check all connections. Be sure match  
the right channel on the speaker with the  
right channel on the speaker terminals (see  
page 25).  
No audio  
No sound is output when a  
function is selected.  
• Improper connections.  
• Make sure the component is connected  
correctly (see pages 16-26).  
• Sound is muted.  
• The volume is turned down.  
• Speakers are turned off.  
• Press MUTING on the remote control.  
• Adjust MASTER VOLUME.  
• Press SPEAKERS (A/B) to select the  
speakers you connected (see page 75).  
• Select the proper signal with the SIGNAL  
SELECT button (see page 45).  
• Turn MULTI CH IN mode off (see page  
53).  
• DIGITAL/ANALOG setting is incorrect.  
• MULTI CH IN mode is on.  
No sound output from the  
front speakers.  
• The front speakers aren't connected  
properly.  
• Check all connections. (see page 25).  
No sound output from  
surround or center speakers.  
• Speaker settings are incorrect.  
• See SPEAKER SETTING on pages 40-41  
to check the speaker settings.  
• The surround or center speakers aren't  
connected properly.  
• The listening mode is STEREO.  
• Check all connections (see page 25).  
•
Choose a surround listening mode (see page  
44).  
No sound output from the  
subwoofer.  
• The subwoofer setting is NO.  
• Change the setting to YES or PLUS (see  
pages 40-41).  
• Adjust the output setting to the level you  
want (see pages 43,97).  
• Adjust the peak level setting to the level  
you want (see page 102).  
• Change your subwoofer setting to one of  
the following (see pages 40-41):  
Front: SMALL Subwoofer:YES  
• The subwoofer output setting is too low.  
• The bass peak level setting is too low.  
• There is very little low frequency  
information in your source.  
Front:LARGE Subwoofer:PLUS  
• Raise the frequency level to match your  
speakers' characteristics (see page 96)  
• Check the three following points:  
• Check the power.  
• The crossover frequency is set too low.  
• There is a problem with the subwoofer.  
• Check the subwoofer volume control .  
• Check the subwoofer hasn't  
automatically switched to standby mode  
(check the subwoofer manual)  
• Check all connections (see page 25).  
• The subwoofer isn't connected properly.  
No sound output from the  
surround back speakers.  
• The SB CH MODE is set to OFF.  
• Set the SB CH MODE to ON or AUTO  
(see page 54).  
• Set the SB CH MODE to ON or AUTO  
and choose one of the SURROUND  
listening modes (see pages 54, 47-48).  
• Check all connections (see pages 25).  
• The source is not a 6.1 channel playback  
source.  
• The surround back speakers aren't  
connected properly.  
• The surround back channel is set to 1  
speaker setting only, and the speaker is  
connected to the right channel output.  
• Connect the speaker to the surround  
back left channel output (see page 25).  
No sound output from one  
(set of) speaker(s).  
• The speaker system setting is NO.  
• Change the speaker setting to YES (see  
pages 40-41).  
• The speaker isn't connected properly.  
• The source has no sound output for that  
channel.  
• Check all connections (see page 25).  
• If you choose one of the SURROUND  
listening modes, a channel may be created  
for the speaker (see page 44).  
• The speaker output level is set too small.  
• Increase the speaker output level.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
Sound is produced from  
some components, but not  
from digital components.  
• SIGNAL SELECT is set incorrectly.  
• Set SIGNAL SELECT to AUTO or  
according to the type of connections made  
(see page 45).  
• Set the digital input settings correctly  
(see pages 12, 23, and especially 91).  
• Check all connections.  
• The digital inputs are assigned  
incorrectly, or not at all.  
• The digital components aren't connected  
properly.  
• The player is not compatible with the  
source you're using, or the player settings  
are incorrect.  
• Choose a compatible source, or check  
the player's manual for the correct settings.  
• The MULTI CH IN mode has been  
selected.  
• Choose one of the listening modes (see  
pages 46-48). The MULTI CH IN switches  
off automatically.  
• The digital output level has been turned  
down on a CD player or other component  
equipped with digital output level  
adjustment capability.  
• Set the digital volume level of the player  
to full, or to the neutral position.  
Other audio problems  
Subwoofer output is very  
low.  
• Settings route signal away from  
subwoofer.  
• To get more signal to the subwoofer set  
it to PLUS or choose SMALL for the front  
speakers (see pages 40-41).  
During multichannel  
• That speaker is set to NO.  
• Set the speaker to YES.  
playback, there is no sound  
output from one speaker.  
A multi channel DVD source  
appears to be downmixed  
from 2 channels during  
playback.  
• The source is coming from something  
other than the MULTI CH IN jacks (for  
example, digital PCM output, etc.)  
• Check the MULTI CH IN connection (see  
page 22) and select the type of playback  
with the MULTI CH IN button (see page 53).  
Considerable noise in radio  
broadcasts.  
• Incorrect frequency.  
• Tune in the correct frequency.  
• Connect the antenna (see page 24).  
• Route digital cables away from the  
antenna terminals and wires.  
• The antenna is not connected.  
• Digital cables are near the antenna  
terminals and wires.  
Broadcast stations cannot  
be selected.  
• The channel step interval doesn't match  
that of your country or region. (multi-voltage  
model only)  
• Match the channel step interval with that  
of your country or region (see page 58).  
Broadcast stations cannot  
be selected automatically.  
• The antenna is poorly positioned.  
• Adjust the direction and position for best  
reception.  
• Turn off the equipment causing the noise  
or move it away from the receiver.  
• Place the antenna farther away from the  
equipment causing the noise.  
• Interference caused by other equipment  
(fluorescent lamp, motor, etc.).  
• Weak radio signals.  
• Connect an outdoor AM or FM antenna  
(see page 24).  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even when there is no sound  
being input.  
• There is electrical interference from  
another component or appliance.  
• Check that personal computers or other  
digital components connected to the same  
power source are not causing interference.  
When a search is performed  
by a DTS compatible CD  
player during playback,  
noise is output.  
• The search function performed by the  
player interferes with the reading of digital  
information.  
• This is not a malfunction, but be sure to  
turn the volume down to prevent the output  
of loud noise from your speakers.  
When playing a DTS format  
LD there is noise audible on  
the soundtrack.  
• The SIGNAL SELECT is on ANALOG.  
• Set the SIGNAL SELECT to DIGITAL (see  
page 45).  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
Audio doesn't record (in  
some cases, even if video  
does).  
• You are trying to make an analog  
recording from a digital signal, or a digital  
recording of an analog source.  
• You can only record analog to analog, or  
digital to digital. Make sure the playback  
and recording components are hooked up  
with the same kind of connections.  
• You can't record digital sources that have  
been copy protected.  
• The digital source is copy protected.  
• The jacks for recording have not been  
connected properly.  
• Check connections (see pages 20 & 22).  
Video  
No image is output when a  
function is selected.  
• Improper connections.  
• Make sure the component is connected  
correctly (see pages 16, 17-19).  
• Press the correct function button.  
• Please read the TV monitor manual and  
change the settings accordingly.  
• Use the same cable to connect to your  
TV and all your video equipment (see pages  
16-23).  
• The input source is not properly selected.  
• The video input selected on the TV  
monitor is incorrect.  
• The TV or monitor is hooked up with cord  
that is different than that used for the video  
player.  
• The component video setting is  
incorrect.  
• Select the correct COMPONENT IN  
SELECT setting (see page 93).  
There is no image coming  
from the selected  
component video jacks.  
• The type of cord connected to the TV  
doesn't match your video input settings.  
• Change the settings to match the cord  
connected (see page 16).  
Can't record video.  
• The source is copy protected.  
• You can't record sources that have been  
copy protected.  
• You are trying to record a source  
connected to the component video jacks.  
• The recorder's video input is hooked up  
using a different type of cord to the source  
video output.  
• Connect the component with S video or  
composite video cords (see pages 16).  
• Hook up the source and the recorder  
using the same type of video cord.  
Input/display  
The display is dark.  
• The display DIMMER button is pushed.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control  
repeatedly to return to the default setting  
(see page 56).  
You can't get DIGITAL to  
come up when using the  
SIGNAL SELECT button.  
• Either the digital connections or the  
• Make sure the digital connections (see  
pages 17–19 & 22–23) and the DIGITAL IN  
SELECT (see page 91) are done correctly.  
• Turn MULTI CH IN mode off (see page  
54).  
DIGITAL-IN SELECT is incorrect.  
• MULTI CH IN mode is on.  
The digital format indicator  
doesn't light up even when  
playing a non-PCM digital  
source.  
• The player is paused or stopped.  
• There is a mistake in the player settings  
for audio output.  
• Play the source.  
• Fix the audio settings (check the manual  
that came with your DVD player).  
A compressed digital source  
is being played, but the  
digital format indicators  
don't light up.  
• Although it's a non-PCM digital source  
there is a possibility the present track is not  
the proper format (5.1, 6.1, or 7.1 channel).  
• There is no problem. The indicator won't  
light when the track is not a compressed  
digital source.  
During playback of a  
compressed digital source,  
the PRO LOGIC ll or NEO:6  
indicators show in the  
display.  
• The digital signal is not being sent with  
the source.  
• The audio is in two channel format.  
• It has already been Dolby Surround  
encoded.  
• Choose DIGITAL or AUTO with the signal  
select button (see page 45).  
• This is not a malfunction. Check the  
manufacturer information for the source.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
During playback of a  
Surround EX or DTS ES  
source on the AUTO setting,  
the EX and ES indicators  
won't light.  
• The source may be 6.1 playback  
compatible, but there is no signal from the  
source to indicate this.  
• Switch the SB CH MODE to ON (see  
page 54).  
During playback of a DVD  
audio source, the player  
shows a transfer rate of 96  
kHz, but the receiver does  
not.  
• The multichannel connections are analog,  
so there is no digital transfer.  
• This is not a malfunction. See the  
player's manual for more details.  
During playback of a 96 kHz  
source, the display doesn't  
show 96 kHz  
• SIGNAL SELECT is set to ANALOG  
• SET the SIGNAL SELECT to AUTO (see  
page 45).  
Remote control  
Cannot be remote  
controlled.  
• The remote control batteries have worn  
• Replace the batteries (see page 7).  
out.  
• Too far away or improper angle of  
operation.  
• Operate within 7 m and a 30° angle of  
the remote sensor on the front panel (see  
page 8).  
• There is an obstacle between the  
receiver and the remote control.  
• Strong light such as fluorescent light is  
shining onto the unit's remote control signal  
light-receiving window.  
• A cord is connected to the CONTROL IN  
terminal on this unit.  
• Remove the obstacle or operate from  
another position (see page 8).  
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the  
front panel to direct light.  
• Connect cord to the correct jack.  
• The IR Receiver type is mismatched with  
the setting.  
• Disconnect the IR Receiver from the rear  
panel, and set to the other IR Receiver type  
using the remote control.  
Other components can't be  
operated with the system  
remote.  
• The preset code settings are wrong.  
• The batteries wore out and the system  
settings were cleared.  
• Input the correct preset code.  
• Reset the proper system settings.  
The SR cable is connected,  
but the connected  
• The SR cable hasn't been connected  
properly.  
• The rest of the component connection  
have not been made.  
• The component you have hooked up is  
not SR compatible.  
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it is  
the right jack (see page 79).  
• Make sure an analog connection has  
been made between the units.  
• This is not a malfunction.  
components can't be  
operated with the remote.  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity  
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
Maintenance of External Surfaces  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust  
and dirt.  
• When the surfaces are dirty, wipe with a soft  
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five  
or six times with water, and wrung out well, and  
then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use  
furniture wax or cleaners.  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays  
or other chemicals on or near this unit, since  
these will corrode the surfaces.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Preset Code Brands  
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but you can only  
set these code brands for the button that is assigned to that component. So, for example, the TV codes can only  
be set to the TV or TVCONT button. Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be  
controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the code brands for the manufacturer in the list  
will not work for the model that you are using. If you can’t find a preset code brands that matches the  
component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote  
control (see pages 68-69).  
DVD  
CD  
TAPE  
Brand  
Brand  
Brand  
PIONEER  
DENON  
JVC  
PHILIPS  
PANASONIC  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SONY  
TOSHIBA  
YAMAHA  
PIONEER  
DENON  
FISHER  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
ONKYO  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
RCA  
PIONEER  
DENON  
FISHER  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
NAKAMICHI  
ONKYO  
PHILIPS  
SONY  
KENWOOD  
LOEWE  
LUXOR  
LXI  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MARTA  
MATSUI  
MEMOREX  
MINOLTA  
MITSUBISHI  
MULTITECH  
NEC  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
YAMAHA  
LD  
SANYO  
SHARP  
Brand  
PIONEER  
DENON  
KENWOOD  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
SONY  
SONY  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
YAMAHA  
TUNER  
NOKIA OCEANIC  
NOKIA  
NORDMENDE  
OKANO  
OLYMPIC  
ORION  
PANASONIC  
PENTAX  
Brand  
PIONEER  
STB (SATELLITE/  
CATV)  
VCR  
YAMAHA  
Brand  
Brand  
PIONEER  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
AKAI  
ALBA  
AUDIO DYNAMIC  
BELL&HOWELL  
BLAUPUNKT  
BROCSONIC  
BUSH  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
CD-R  
PIONEER  
BLAUPUNKT  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
GOLDSTAR  
GRUNDIG  
HAMLIN  
HNS/HUGHES  
HITACHI  
ITT/NOKIA  
JERROLD  
NEC  
PHONOLA  
QUASAR  
RCA/PROSCAN  
REALISTIC  
SABA  
SAMSUNG  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
Brand  
PIONEER  
DENON  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
PHILIPS  
SONY  
CANON  
CGM  
SCHNEIDER  
SCOTT  
DVR  
OAK  
CITIZEN  
SEG  
Brand  
PIONEER  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
CLATRONIC  
CRAIG  
SELECO  
SHARP  
RADIO SHACK  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
SIEMENS  
SONY  
TOSHIBA  
TOCOM  
ZENITH  
CURTIS MATHIS  
DAEWOO  
DBX  
DIMENSIA  
EMERSON  
FERGUSON  
FISHER  
SIEMENS  
SIGNATURE  
SONY  
SYLVANIA  
SYMPHONIC  
TANDBERG  
TASHIRO  
TATUNG  
MD  
Brand  
PIONEER  
DENON  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
SONY  
FUNAI  
GE  
TEAC  
YAMAHA  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRUNDIG  
HITACHI  
INSTANT REPLAY  
ITT/NOKIA  
JC PENNY  
JVC  
TECHNICS  
TELEFUNKEN  
THORN  
TOSHIBA  
UNIVERSUM  
W.WHOUSE  
WARDS  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
KENDO  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
TV  
Brand  
PIONEER  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
AKAI  
ALBA  
PANASONIC  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
PHONOLA  
PORTLAND  
PROSCAN  
QUASAR  
RADIO  
RADIO SHACK  
RADIOLA  
RCA/PROSCAN  
SABA  
AOC  
BESTAR  
BLAUPUNKT  
BLUE SKY  
BRANDT  
BROCSONIC  
BUSH  
CLATRONIC  
CRAIG  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
CROSLEX  
CURTIS MATHIS  
DAEWOO  
DAYTRON  
DUAL  
EMERSON  
FERGUSON  
FIRST  
SCHNEIDER  
SCOTT  
SHARP  
SIEMENS  
SIGNATURE  
SONY  
SYLVANIA  
SYMPHONIC  
TATUNG  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
GE  
TELEFUNKEN  
THOMSON  
THORN  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRANDIENTE  
GRUNDIG  
HITACHI  
ICE  
IRRADIO  
ITT/NOKIA  
JC PENNY  
JVC  
TOSHIBA  
UNIVERSUM  
VIDECH  
W.WHOUSE  
WARDS  
WATSON  
ZENITH  
KENDO  
KTV  
LOEWE  
LXI  
MAGNAVOX  
MARK  
MATSUI  
MATSUSHITA  
MEDION  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
NEC  
NOKIA OCEANIC  
NORDMENDE  
OKANO  
ONWA  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Specifications (European model)  
VIDEO Section (Composite)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
Amplifier Section  
Continuous Power Output (DIN)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD,  
TV/SAT .........................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT,  
MONITOR OUT2 .........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
FRONT .......... 100 W + 100 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
CENTER ....................... 100 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
SURROUND ......................................... 100 W + 100 W  
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
SURROUND BACK............................... 100 W + 100 W  
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, TV/SAT, DVD/LD  
+0  
Rated Power Output ................................ 100 W + 100 W  
(20 Hz – 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)  
VIDEO=MONITOR OUT,............. 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
–3  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 65 dB  
FM Tuner Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
Frequency Range ........................... 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity........ Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity .........................Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................... Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion ........................................ Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity ................... 60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation ........................................ 40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response ................. 30 Hz to 15 kHz ( 1 dB)  
Antenna Input .........................................75 Ω unbalanced  
PHONO MM ............................................4.7 mV/47 kΩ  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2.......................335 mV/47 kΩ  
Frequency Response  
PHONO MM  
..................................... 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz 0.3 dB  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2......5 Hz to 100,000 Hz +0 dB  
–3  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR REC, VCR 2 REC, CD-R/TAPE 1 REC,  
MD/TAPE 2 REC.................................... 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
AM Tuner Section  
BASS ..................................................... 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE ................................................. 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS .......................... +4/+2 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)  
(at volume position -40dB)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2, MULTI CH IN .......... 101 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Frequency Range ............................ 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) ........................... 350 µV/m  
Selectivity ................................................................. 25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB  
Antenna........................................................ Loop antenna  
Miscellaneous  
[DIN (Continuous rated power output/50 mW)]  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2............................... 92/65 dB  
Power Requirements ................. AC 220 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption ............................................... 600 W  
Power Consumption in Standby mode .................... 0.7 W  
AC Outlets  
SWITCHED......................................100 W (0.8A) MAX.  
Dimensions .................... 420 (W) × 188 (H) × 464 (D) mm  
Weight (without package) ...................................... 19.6 kg  
VIDEO Section (S jack)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD, TV/SAT  
Luminance signal (Y) ...............................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Chrominance signal (C).....................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Furnished Parts  
FM Wire Antenna.............................................................1  
AM Loop Antenna ........................................................... 1  
“AA” IEC LR6 batteries .................................................. 4  
Remote Control Unit ........................................................1  
Microphone for Auto Surround Sound Setup...................1  
Microphone Stand for Auto Surround Sound Setup ........1  
Operating Instructions .................................................... 1  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT  
Luminance signal (Y) ...............................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Chrominance signal (C).....................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD, TV/SAT  
Luminance signal (Y) ................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
+0  
–3  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Luminance signal (Y) ........................................ 65 dB  
NOTE:  
Component Video Section  
Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Input (Sensitivity)  
Y
................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
PB/PR .............................................................0.7 V/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Y
................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
PB/PR .............................................................0.7 V/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
+0  
Y
................................................. 5 Hz to 40 MHz dB  
PB/PR ............................................ 5 Hz to 40 MHz dB  
–3  
+0  
–3  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Specifications (multi-voltage model)  
Amplifier Section  
VIDEO Section (S jack)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
Maximum Output Power .......................... 130 W/channel  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD, TV/SAT  
Luminance signal (Y) ...............................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Chrominance signal (C).....................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
(1 kHz, THD 10.0 %, 8 Ω)  
Continuous Power Output (DIN)  
FRONT ..... 100 W + 100 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT  
CENTER .................. 100 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
Luminance signal (Y) ...............................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Chrominance signal (C).....................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD, TV/SAT  
Luminance signal (Y) ................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
SURROUND ......................................... 100 W + 100  
W
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
SURROUND BACK............................... 100 W + 100  
W
+0  
–3  
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Rated Power Output ................................ 100 W + 100 W  
Luminance signal (Y) ........................................ 65 dB  
(20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)  
Component Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
Y
................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
PHONO MM ............................................4.7 mV/47 kΩ  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2 .......................335 mV/47 kΩ  
PB/PR .............................................................0.7 V/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Y
................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Phono Overload level (T.H.D.0.1 %, 1kHz)  
PHONO MM ..................................................... 120 mV  
PB/PR .............................................................0.7 V/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
+0  
Y
................................................. 5 Hz to 40 MHz dB  
Frequency Response  
–3  
+0  
–3  
PB/PR ............................................ 5 Hz to 40 MHz dB  
PHONO MM .................... 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz 0.3 dB  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2 ......5 Hz to 100,000 Hz +–30 dB  
VIDEO Section (Composite)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD,  
TV/SAT .........................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
LINE ...................................................... 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
BASS ..................................................... 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE ................................................. 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS ..............................+10 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT,  
MONITOR OUT2 .........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, TV/SAT, DVD/LD  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2, MULTI CH IN .......... 101 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
+0  
VIDEO=MONITOR OUT, ............. 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
–3  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 65 dB  
[DIN (Continuous rated power output/50 mW)]  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1/MD, MD/TAPE 2........................ 92/65 dB  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range ........................... 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity.............. Mono:13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/ 75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity .........................Mono: 20.2 dBf  
............................................................ Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................... Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
............................................... Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion ........................................ Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity ................... 60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation ........................................ 40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response ................. 30 Hz to 15 kHz ( 1 dB)  
Antenna Input .........................................75 Ω unbalanced  
Signal-to Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1/MD, MD/TAPE 2............................. 93 dB  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range ............ 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz (9 kHz step)  
.................................... 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz (10 kHz step)  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) ........................... 350 µV/m  
Selectivity ................................................................. 25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB  
Antenna ........................................................ Loop antenna  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Miscellaneous  
Power Requirements  
............................ AC 110/120-127/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption ............................................... 600 W  
Power Consumption in Standby mode .................... 0.9 W  
Dimensions .................... 420 (W) × 188 (H) × 464 (D) mm  
Weight (without package) ...................................... 19.6 kg  
Furnished Parts  
FM Wire Antenna.............................................................1  
AM Loop Antenna ........................................................... 1  
“AA” IEC LR6 batteries .................................................. 4  
Remote Control Unit ........................................................1  
Microphone for Auto Surround Sound Setup...................1  
Microphone Stand for Auto Surround Sound Setup ........1  
AC Power Cord ............................................................... 2  
Operating Instructions .................................................... 1  
NOTE:  
Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2002 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada  
PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300  
San Lorenzo 1009 3er Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico D.F. C.P. 03100  
TEL: 55-5688-5290  
Printed in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<TNGZF/02F00001>  
<ARB7263-A>  

Perle Systems Network Router 5500079 12 User Manual
Phase Technology Speaker Cinemicro One User Manual
Philips Clock Radio SJ T113632006 User Manual
Philips Speaker System MMS 260 User Manual
PNY Network Card P NSA2 EC RF User Manual
Polaroid Digital Camera Cameras I User Manual
Poulan Tiller 423813 User Manual
Premier Automobile Alarm DEH P520 User Manual
Princeton CRT Television 15Vdc User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Video System PLVHR5IR User Manual